Cfte  Hfftrarg 


of  tije 


dnitoet0itp  of  Bout  Carolina 


The  Sylvester  Hassell  Collection 

FROM  THE   LIBRARY  OF 

Sylvester  Hassell,  D.  D. 

CLASS     OF      62 

GIVEN   BY    HIS   CHILDREN 


UNIVERSITY  OF 
NORTH  CAROLINA 

*—       Tr-n       ■■    '  i 

ft*koo!  of    Library 
Seien«e 


.6tfr 


X 


4*. to**. 


?  a  ... 


A  LIBRARY  FOR  MY  COUNTRYMEN. 


A  series  of  iustructive  works  adapted  to  the  youthful  mind,  of 
a  character  associated  with  the  annals  of  our  country,  has  long 
been  wanted.  This  library  is  intended  to  comprise  sketches 
of  the  Lives,  Adventures  and  Discoveries  of  the  early  founders 
of  America ;  also  the  lives  of  distinguished  men  connected 
with  American  history  of  more  modern  date  :  it  is  likewise 
intended  to  include  some  approved  works  of  English  authors, 
re-edited  with  additions  and  explanatory  notes.  The  whole 
charge  of  the  Library  is  confided  to  the  hands  of  the  popular 
author  of  "  Uiwle  Philip's"  "  Whale  Fishery"  "Lost  Green- 
land" 6{C.  cf-c. 

The  following  commence  the  Series : 

I. 

Tlie  Life  and  Adventures  of  Henry  Hudson; 

By  the  author  of  "  Uncle  Philip's,"  "  Virginia,"  &c. 
II. 

Adventures  of  Captain  John  Smith ; 

Founder  of  Virginia.    By  the  author  of  "  Henry  Hudson,"  &c. 
ill. 

I) awnings  of  Genius; 

By  Anne  Pratt,  author  of  "  FJowers  and  their  Associations,"  &c. 

IV. 

Life  and  Adventures  of  Herman  Cortes ; 

By  the  author  of  the  "  Adventures  of  Captain  John  Smith,"  &c. 


Just  Published, 
THE    CROFTON    BOYS; 

A  Tale  for  Youth.    By  Harriet  Martineau,  author  of  "  The  Peasant 
and  the  Prince,"  "Norway  and  the  Norwegians,"  &c. 
This  truly   interesting  and  instructive    work  forms  the  sixteenth  volume  of  the 
popular  series  of  "  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 

THE    OLD    OAK   TREE; 

A  most  interesting-  little  volume  of  practical  instruction  for  youth ; 
illustrated  with  nearly  fifty  plates. 

"This  volume  comprises  a  feries  of  twelve  familiar  disccurses  or  conversations 
which  took  place  on  as  many  Sabbath  afiernoons,  a  pious  old  blind  man  being  tbechief 
speaker.  It  is  by  tlie  author  of  '  John  Hardy,'  '  The  Footman,'  &c,  and  is  published 
under  the  direction  of  the  Society  for  the  promotion  of  Christian  Knowledge.  The 
precepts  conveyed  are  altogether  unexceptionable,  and  the  whole  volume  is  well  calcu- 
lated to  prove  attractive  with  children.— Sat:_Chron\ch.'lt 


TALES 


THE  PEOPLE  AND  THEIR  CHILDREN. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

BY  MRS.  SANDHAM. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2012  with  funding  from 

University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 


http://archive.org/details/twinsisterstalefOOsand 


THE 


TWIN    SISTERS; 


A  TALE  FOR  YOUTH. 


BY  MRS.  SANDHAM. 


O  Sacred  Solitude  !  divine  retreat ! 
Choice  of  the  prudent,  wisdom  of  the  great ! 
By  thy  pure  stream,  or  in  thy  waving  shade, 
We  court  fair  Wisdom,  that  celestial  maid  !" 


FROM    THE    TWENTIETH    LONDON   EDITION. 


NEW    YORK: 

D.    APPLETON    &    COMPANY, 

200  Broadway. 

MDCCCXLII. 


PREFACE. 


The  following  work  is  intended  to  display  the 
benefits  of  devotion,  which  are  illustrated  in  the 
lives  of  two  very  young  persons,  whose  pursuits 
were  not  the  vanities  of  the  world,  but  the  true 
and  lasting  pleasures  of  religion,  and  time  well 
spent. 

There  are  few,  even  of  those  who  do  not 
study  to  live  by  its  rules,  that  are  not  willing  to 
acknowledge  the  efficacy  of  religion  in  the  hour 
of  death,  or  on  a  bed  of  sickness  ;  though  they 
are  inclined  to  put  off  all  thoughts  of  it  till  that 
awful  period.  But  in  this  short  history  will  be 
seen,  (and  the  truth  of  the  illustration  may  be 
perceived  by  general  observation,)  that  if  the 
duties  of  a  Christian  profession  are  not  attended 
to  in  our  lives,  its  support  and  consolations  in 
those  trying  scenes  cannot  be  felt  either  by  the 
dying  or  their  surviving  friends. 
1* 


6  PREFACE. 

This  important  truth  has,  no  doubt,  been  often 
enforced  on  many  of  my  young  readers,  and  in  a 
way  more  large  and  comprehensive  than  in  this 
simple  tale  :  yet,  as,  after  having  observed  a 
charming  view  of  nature  reflected  in  a  mirror, 
where  each  object,  though  lessened  to  our  sight, 
is  distinctly  seen,  and  bears  its  due  proportion 
to  the  whole,  we  are  still  inclined  to  survey  the 
scene  itself,  and  perhaps  with  more  accurate 
attention  than  before  ;  it  is  hoped  that  this  feeble 
attempt  to  exemplify  the  satisfaction  arising  from 
a  religious  life  will  not  therefore  be  altogether 
useless  or  unentertaining. 


THE 

TWIN    SISTERS 


CHAPTER  I. 

"  Fancy  and  pride  seek  things  at  vast  expense, 
Which  relish  not  the  reason  nor  the  sense." 

Young. 

When  nearly  five  years  old,  Ellen  and  Anna 
Stanley,  twin  sisters,  were  left  to  the  care  of  an 
aunt — not  owing  to  the  death  of  their  parents,  but 
to  their  removal  from  England  to  the  East  Indies, 
being  allured  by  the  hope  of  obtaining  some  of 
those  riches  which  have  too  often  drawn  the  in- 
habitants of  this  island  thither,  and  made  them 
abandon  their  children  to  the  care  of  less  af- 
fectionate guardians  than  these  little  girls  found 
in  Mrs.  Irvin.  It  might  have  been  supposed 
that,  having  only  these  two  children,  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Stanley  could  not  have  admitted  a  thought  of  a 
separation  from  them,  and  that  while  they  could 
have  promised  themselves  the  satisfaction  of  leav- 
ing them  a  handsome  fortune,  they  would  have 
endeavored,  by  attending  to  their  education,  to 
instruct  them  in  the  proper  use  of  it ;  but  such  was 
not  the  conduct  of  those  votaries  of  dissipation. 
They  had  lived  among  those  whose  riches  seemed 


8  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

the  only  means  of  procuring  happiness  ;  and  while 
Mr.  Stanley  daily  saw  his  wealthy  neighbors  en- 
joying new  amusements,  he  had  not  the  wisdom 
to  reflect,  that  none  of  their  pursuits  could  afford 
them  lasting  pleasure  ;  or  why  would  they  be  so 
often  changed  for  others  ?  He  thought  that  variety 
is  the  chief  source  of  happiness,  which,  in  a  think- 
ing mind,  will  cause  a  doubt  of  its  reality.  Both 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  were  fond  of  society,  and 
lived  much  beyond  their  income,  in  endeavoring 
to  keep  what  is  called  the  best  company.  While 
this  was  the  case,  it  cannot  be  imagined  that  they 
could  behold  with  much  pleasure  those  children 
whom  they  were  confessedly  injuring,  in  what 
they  deemed  the  most  essential  requisite  of  life — 
their  fortune,  and  to  obtain  an  increase  of  which 
they  afterward  parted  from  them  for  so  long  a 
time. 

It  was  just  before  this  separation  that  Mrs.  Ir- 
vin,  the  sister  of  Mrs.  Stanley,  after  having  re- 
fused many  former  invitations,  came  to  town.  She 
had  lived  for  several  years  in  the  country,  with  a 
husband  whom  she  much  valued  and  esteemed, 
and  whose  death  she  had  mourned  the  last  two 
years.  Having  no  family  of  her  own,  and  bless- 
ed with  an  ample  fortune,  she  followed  his  ex- 
ample in  considering  the  neighboring  poor  as  her 
peculiar  charge  :  nor  did  she  find  so  much  grati- 
fication in  any  pleasure  the  world  could  afford 
her,  as  in  contributing  to  their  welfare.  Such 
sentiments  as  these,  frequently  expressed  in  her 
letters  to  her  sister,  excited  her  surprise,  espe- 
cially after  Mr.  Irvin's  death,  when  she  expected 
she  would  declare  herself  tired  of  the  uniform  life 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  9 

she  had  led  with  him,  and  be  impatient  to  return 
to  society.  "  While  he  lived,"  she  would  say, 
"  she  did  not  so  much  wonder  at  her  sister's  wish 
to  avoid  the  world,  as  he  was  so  strange  and  un- 
accountable a  man,  that  he  could  make  no  figure 
in  it ;  but  that  for  two  years  after  his  death  she 
should  remain  in  solitude,  was  a  circumstance 
that  she  could  not  account  for." 

The  truth  was,  nothing  but  the  wish  of  seeing 
the  children  of  her  sister  could  have  induced 
Mrs.  Irvin  once  more  to  visit  London ;  but 
when  she  considered,  that  they  were  now  old 
enough  to  be  instructed  in  many  things,  and  yet 
found  no  mention  made  of  them  in  any  of  their 
mother's  letters,  and  that  the  general  answer  to 
all  her  inquiries  was,  that  they  were  "  very  well," 
while  every  other  part  was  filled  with  accounts 
of  balls,  routs,  and  dining  parties,  in  which  she 
was  continually  engaged,  she  thought  it  her  duty  to 
endeavor,  by  every  means  in  her  power,  to  promote 
their  education. 

On  her  arrival  in  Portman-square,  where  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Stanley  then  resided,  she  was  struck 
with  the  alteration  she  perceived  in  the  latter, 
whose  dress  and  manners  were  in  the  extremity 
of  the  fashion ;  and  highly  painted  as  she  was, 
she  could  scarcely  discover  any  traces  of  the  sis- 
ter she  had  twelve  years  before  parted  from  with 
so  much  regret.  At  that  time  Mrs.  Stanley  was 
between  eighteen  and  nineteen,  and  lived  with 
this  her  only  sister,  who  was  several  years  older 
than  herself,  and  had  then  been  married  some  time 
to  Mr.  Irvin.  While  under  their  roof,  she  re- 
ceived an  invitation  to  town  for  the  first  time  in 


10  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

her  life  ;  and,  new  as  all  its  pleasures  were  to  her, 
she  earnestly  entreated  her  sister's  consent  to  ac- 
cept of  it.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Irvin  were  then  her 
only  guardians,  as  their  father  had  died  soon  after 
the  marriage  of  his  eldest  daughter.  Unable  to 
refuse  her  request,  they  parted  from  her  with  visi- 
ble reluctance,  yet  unwilling  to  express  their  dis- 
approbation ;  while  she,  though  attached  to  her 
sister  from  childhood,  could  not  now  feel  regret  at 
leaving  her,  to  taste  of  enjoyments  she  had  long 
eagerly  wished  for,  and  to  enter  on  a  scene  of  life 
in  which  she  had  been  taught  to  expect  their  daily 
increase.  Full  of  pleasing  anticipations,  she  came 
to  London  ;  and,  by  the  mistaken  kindness  of  her 
friends,  was  immediately  plunged  into  all  its 
gayeties.  tAt  one-and-twenty,  she  married  Mr. 
Stanley,  with  whom  she  continued  the  same 
round  of  dissipation,  unconcerned  at  what  her  sis- 
ter, whom  she  had  formerly  thought  her  best  ad- 
viser, might  think  of  her,  and  to  whose  remon- 
strances she  paid  but  little  attention.  The 
embarrassment  of  their  affairs  would  now  and 
then  cause  a  sigh  of  regret  in  Mrs.  Stanley,  till 
the  fear  of  reflection  made  her  enter  still  deeper 
into  the  pursuits  of  fashionable  life  ;  so  that  when 
Mrs.  Irvin  again  met  her  sister,  she  found  her  a 
complete  fine  lady,  insensible  to  any  affection 
which  terminated  not  in  self;  negligent  of  her 
children  ;  and,  under  the  mask  of  happiness,  con- 
cealing the  uneasiness  which,  notwithstanding  all 
her  endeavors  to  avoid,  would  often  arise  in  her 
mind,  when  conscience,  whose  voice  will  and 
must  be  heard  by  all,  whispered  to  her  that  she 
was  wrong. 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  11 

As  Mrs.  Irvin  came  in  her  own  carriage,  she 
was  two  days  on  the  road,  and  reached  the  house 
of  her  sister  before  their  usual  dinner-hour.  She 
was  received  by  Mrs.  Stanley  without  the  emotions 
my  readers  would  suppose  so  long  an  absence 
would  create  ;  and  the  plain  and  simple  dress  her 
sister  wore,  attracted  her  attention  much  more 
than  the  affectionate  manner  in  which  she  ad- 
dressed her. 

After  answering  the  inquiries  that  Mrs.  Stanley 
thought  it  civil  to  make,  Mrs.  Irvin  expressed  a 
wish  to  be  introduced  to  the  children. — "  Would 
you  see  them  directly  ?"  said  Mrs.  Stanley,  with 
indifference  ;  "  I  doubt  whether  they  are  dressed 
or  not ;"  and  ringing  the  bell,  she  ordered  the 
servant  to  tell  Martin  to  bring  the  young  ladies  to 
her.  This  was  a  summons  so  new  to  them,  that 
it  was  with  difficulty  they  could  be  persuaded  to 
enter  the  room ;  where,  they  were  told,  "  a  lady 
that  was  come  to  stay  with  their  mamma  wanted 
to  see  them." 

At  length  two  sweet  little  girls  made  their  ap- 
pearance at  the  parlor  door,  attended  by  an  elderly 
servant,  on  whom  they  seemed  to  depend  for  direc- 
tion and  support.  The  countenance  and  the  dress 
of  each  were  nearly  alike  ;  and  Mrs.  Irvin  looked 
at  them  with  pleasure,  though  she  could  ill  con- 
ceal her  feelings  of  regret  when  she  perceived 
that  they  seemed  equally  fearful  of  approaching 
their  mother  and  herself,  to  whom  they  were 
quite  unknown. 

0  It  is,  as  I  have  told  you  in  my  letters,"  said 
Mrs.  Stanley,  with  an  air  of  unconcern,  "  that 
nobody  but    their   maids    are   allowed  to  come 


12  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

near  them.  Martin,  do  you  lead  them  to  their 
aunt." 

Martin  obeyed  her  order  ;  and  Mrs.  Irvin  rose 
to  meet  the  little  strangers.'  "  My  dears,"  said 
she,  "  I  am  your  aunt ;  won't  you  let  me  kiss 
you  ?"  And  she  took  a  hand  of  each. — "  They 
are  sweet  children,"  said  she  to  her  sister ;  "  which 
is  Ellen  1  and  which  is  Anna,  my  namesake  ?" 

"  Upon  my  word,"  said  Mrs.  Stanley,  "  you  al- 
most puzzle  me." 

"  I  am  Ellen,"  said  the  little  blushing  girl,  who 
still  retained  her  hand  in  that  of  her  aunt,  while 
her  sister  had  withdrawn  hers,  and  was  endeavoring 
to  hide  her  face  in  Martin's  gown  :  "  I  am  Ellen 
Stanley,"  said  she,  as  she  received  an  affectionate 
kiss  from  her  delighted  aunt. 

"  This,  then,  is  Anna,"  said  she,  drawing  the 
other  child  toward  her  :  "  come,  my  little  name- 
sake, you  must  let  me  kiss  you  likewise  :"  and 
she  took  the  trembling  child  on  her  lap.  Ellen 
approached  also,  and  while  she  held  the  hand  of 
her  sister,  they  both  appeared  to  receive  pleasure 
from  the  caresses  of  their  new  friend. 

"  You  are  highly  honored,"  said  Mrs.  Stanley, 
not  a  little  chagrined  at  the  preference  the 
children  had  given.  "  I  dare  say  I  could  not  get 
either  of  them  to  sit  on  my  knee  : — will  you  come 
to  me,  Ellen?"  added  she,  stretching  out  her 
hand.  The  little  girl  looked  at  Martin  with  sur- 
prise ;  and  reading  in  her  looks  what  she  ought 
to  do,  she  walked  toward  her  mother  with  a  mix- 
ture of  fear  and  diffidence,  that  made  her  still 
more  interesting.  Mrs.  Stanley  received  her 
complacently,  and  kissed  her  cheek  with  an  ap- 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  13 

pearance  of  more  affection  than  she  had  ever 
shown  before.  Ellen  was  delighted  with  this  un- 
expected mark  of  favor  from  her  mother,  and  look- 
ed toward  her  sister,  as  if  she  wished  it  could  be 
bestowed  on  her  also.  For  this  purpose  Mrs.  Irvin 
put  her  off  her  lap  ;  and  no  sooner  did  she  find 
herself  at  liberty,  than  she  returned  to  Martin, 
who,  taking  her  hand,  seemed  to  direct  her  to  ap- 
proach her  mother,  that  she  might  also  receive 
the  long-withheld  token  of  her  regard. 

"  What !  must  I  kiss  you  also  f"  said  Mrs. 
Stanley,  not  displeased  at  her  coming  toward  her  : 
"  come  along,  then :  why,  child,  do  you  look  so 
frightened  ?"  observing  the  tears  in  her  eyes  ; 
"  do  you  think  that  I  shall  eat  you  ?*' 

Anna  had  no  sooner  received  the  kiss  so 
strangely  offered,  than  she  again  returned  to  Mar- 
tin, looking  toward  the  door,  as  if  wishing  for 
their  dismissal. 

"  You  may  take  them  away,  Martin,"  said  their 
mother :  "  I  can  see  they  are  impatient  to  be 
gone  ;  they  are  never  happy  out  of  their  nursery  ; 
I  never  saw  such  shy  children  in  my  life." 

"  Good  by,  my  dear  children,"  said  Mrs.  Ir- 
vin :  "  I  hope  we  shall  soon  be  better  acquainted." 

As  she  once  more  kissed  the  glowing  faces  of 
the  little  girls,  her  voice  and  manners  were  so 
much  kinder  than  what  they  had  been  used  to, 
that  they  already  began  to  feel  a  pleasure  in  her 
company,  and  seemed  less  inclined  to  leave  the 
room,  till  Mrs.  Stanley  again  repeated  her  com- 
mands. They  made  their  courtesies  and  retired, 
pleased  with  the  notice  their  aunt  had  taken  of 
them. 

2 


14  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

As  soon  as  they  were  gone,  Mrs.  Stanley  wished 
to  talk  on  some  other  subject ;  and,  instead  of  in- 
quiring her  sister's  opinion  respecting  them,  she 
began  to  give  her  an  account  of  the  numerous  ac- 
quaintances she  could  introduce  her  to  :  but  Mrs. 
Irvin  paid  very  little  attention  to  the  long  list  of 
names  she  ran  over,  and  repeated  the  pleasure 
she  felt  in  seeing  the  children.  "  They  are  much 
more  sociable  than  I  expected,"  said  she,  "  con- 
fined as  they  are  to  the  nursery :  do  you  often 
visit  them  there  V 

"  I  did,"  replied  Mrs.  Stanley  (with  a  counte- 
nance expressive  of  some  confusion  at  the  ques- 
tion), "  before  Martin  had  the  care  of  them,  as 
often  as  my  numerous  engagements  would  allow ; 
but  now  she  takes  so  much  care  of  them,  that  my 
attendance  is  not  necessary.  She  dresses  them 
properly  enough,  and  makes  them  very  well  be- 
haved. Their  shyness,  I  believe,  never  will  be 
gotten  over ;  and  there  is  no  pleasure  in  going  to 
see  them,  when  it  appears  to  give  them  such  un- 
easiness." 

"  Perhaps  that  might  be  removed,  if  they  were 
more  accustomed  to  your  company,"  said  Mrs. 
Irvin,  much  hurt  at  the  indifference  which  her 
sister  expressed.  The  ladies  now  separated  to 
dress  for  dinner ;  at  which  time  Mrs.  Irvin  was 
introduced  to  Mr.  Stanley,  who  welcomed  her  to 
his  house  with  great  politeness,  in  that  softened 
manner  which  is  too  often  adopted  to  conceal  con- 
tempt and  dislike.  Such  in  his  heart  did  Mr. 
Stanley  feel  for  his  guest,  though  he  had  after- 
ward reason  to  acknowledge  himself  under  infi- 
nite obligations  to  her,  for  relieving  him  when 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  15 

most  distressed ;  for,  on  the  very  next  day,  he 
found  that  the  situation  of  his  affairs  could  no  lon- 
ger be  concealed  ;  and  with  the  utmost  indifference 
he  told  his  wife,  that,  "  unless  she  could  obtain 
assistance  from  her  sister,  they  were  utterly 
ruined."  For  any  one  to  live  beyond  their  in- 
come is  now  become  so  fashionable  a  folly  (not 
to  call  it  by  a  harsher  name),  that  neither  Mr.  nor 
Mrs.  Stanley  dreaded  the  imputation  of  it ;  but 
when,  on  a  closer  examination  of  their  affairs,  it 
was  discovered  that  not  even  the  whole  of  their 
property  would  pay  the  numerous  debts  they  had 
contracted,  then  it  was  that  the  friendship  of  Mrs. 
Irvin  appeared  in  its  true  light ;  she  prevailed  on 
the  friends  of  her  late  husband  to  procure  for  Mr. 
Stanley  an  advantageous  post  in  the  East  Indies, 
and  offered  to  educate  the  children  at  her  own 
expense. 

"  Can  you  indeed  be  so  generous  ?"  said  Mr. 
Stanley,  struck  with  the  sincerity  of  her  profes- 
sions. "  How  have  I  been  deceived  by  those 
who  call  themselves  my  friends !  No  one  would 
interest  himself  about  me  when  I  solicited  his 
assistance  :  each  excused  himself  from  troubling 
his  acquaintance  on  my  account ;  but  you,  to 
whom  I  am  so  little  known,  you  have  indeed  been 
my  best  friend !" 

"  Since  you  allow  me  that  title,"  said  Mrs.  Ir- 
vin, "  wrill  you  suffer  me,  in  one  other  instance,  to 
prove  how  much  I  wish  to  deserve  it  ?  You  ac- 
knowledge that  your  present  distress  is  occasion- 
ed by  your  having  lived  in  too  expensive  a  style  : 
I  forbear  to  censure  ;  but  now  that  you  are  enter- 
ing on  another  scene  of  life,  allow  me  to  hope  that 


16  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

you  will  gain  wisdom  from  experience  ;  your  sit- 
uation will  be  changed,  your  former  associates 
forgotten  :  let  me  advise  you,  then,  to  be  careful 
with  whom  you  again  become  acquainted,  lest 
you  should  a  second  time  be  led  into  error.  But 
I  ought  to  beg  your  pardon  for  offering  my  advice  ; 
a  sensible  man  will  judge  for  himself  whether 
what  I  have  said  is  wrong." 

Then  turning  to  her  sister,  the  tears  started  in 
her  eyes  on  perceiving  the  wounded  feelings  of 
her  mind  strongly  portrayed  in  her  countenance. 
Pride,  shame,  envy,  with  some  degree  of  grateful 
affection,  alternately  appeared  there  ;  while  Mrs. 
Irvin  thus  addressed  her  : — "  My  dearest  sister,  I 
wish  I  could  persuade  you  to  seek  that  happiness 
which  proceeds  from  a  higher  source  than  the 
vain  applause  of  this  world ;  be  assured  the 
knowledge  of  ourselves  is  the  truest  wisdom  ;  and 
now  that  I  am  to  act  the  part  of  a  mother  to  your 
children,  it  shall  be  my  sincere  endeavor  to  in- 
struct them  in  it."  With  much  emotion  she  con- 
tinued : — "  It  is  probable  that  in  this  world  we 
may  never  meet  again  ;  but,  by  the  remembrance 
of  former  years,  and  by  the  strong  attachment 
which  once  subsisted  between  us,  let  me  beg  you 
my  beloved  sister,  seriously  to  consider  for  what 
end  you  are  living ;  and  may  your  reflections  be 
such  as  to  produce  the  most  lasting  happiness ! 
Should  I  die  before  your  return,  the  children  shall 
be  taken  care  of,  and  I  trust  you  will  not  find 
them  injured  by  my  instruction.  Believe  me," 
added  she,  with  increased  affection,  "  the  eternal 
happiness  both  of  them  and  yourself  is  among  the 
first  wishes  of  my  heart." 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  17 

Both  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  were  affected  by 
this  solemn  address  :  they  no  longer  looked  on 
the  manner  and  appearance  of  Mrs.  Irvin  as  sub- 
jects of  derision,  but  endeavored  to  express  their 
thanks,  while  she  hurried  out  of  the  room  to  con- 
ceal her  emotion.  They  could  not  deny  the  truth 
of  what  she  had  said  respecting  their  former  pur- 
suits, and  at  that  moment  felt  resolved  to  follow 
her  advice  in  their  future  conduct. 

Perhaps,  young  as  my  readers  may  be,  they 
have  themselves  formed  good  resolutions  in  the 
hour  of  reflection,  which  not  long  after  have  been 
forgotten :  they  may  know  by  experience  how 
hard  it  is  to  conquer  bad  habits,  and  therefore  will 
not  wonder  if  they  hear  that  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stan- 
ley did  not  long  retain  their  good  intentions.  But 
as  it  is  the  history  of  their  children  that  I  mean 
to  relate,  I  shall  at  present  pass  over  the  conduct 
of  their  parents,  and  in  the  next  chapter  introduce 
my  young  heroines  more  to  notice. 
2* 


18  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 


CHAPTER  II. 

"  Gay  hope  is  theirs,  by  fancy  fed, 
Least  pleasing  when  possess'd  ; 
The  tear  forgot  as  soon  as  shed, 
The  sunshine  of  the  breast." 

Gray. 

To  execute  the  generous  plan  she  had  under- 
taken, and  not  to  discontinue  her  charitable  con- 
tributions to  the  poor  in  her  neighborhood,  Mrs. 
Irvin  thought  it  necessary  to  lay  down  her  car- 
riage, and  in  everything  she  could  to  lessen  her 
expenses  ;  and  this  she  thought  no  sacrifice,  but 
rather  rejoiced  that  by  so  doing  she  would  still 
contribute  to  the  welfare  of  others. 

After  staying  a  fortnight  in  town,  and  seeing 
everything  settled  to  the  advantage  of  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Stanley,  as  far  as  their  present  circumstan- 
ces would  allow,  she  took  an  affectionate  leave  of 
them ;  and  with  the  two  children  and  Martin, 
whom  she  had  engaged  to  continue  as  their  nurse, 
set  off  in  a  hired  chaise  to  her  own  house. 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  parted  from  their  children 
with  less  regret  than  Mrs.  Irvin  liked  to  see  ;  but 
their  minds  were  much  more  occupied  with  the 
voyage  they  were  soon  to  enter  upon.  The  child- 
ren felt  only  pleasure  at  the  thought  of  their  re- 
moval, particularly  when  they  knew  that  Martin 
was  to  accompany  them.  They  shed  no  tears  at 
taking  leave  of  their  parents  ;  but  when  they  were 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  19 

told  it  would  be  a  great  while  before  they  saw 
them  again,  their  countenances  altered,  and  Ellen 
ventured  to  ask,  "  how  long  it  would  be  ?"  She 
was  answered,  that  "  it  was  uncertain." — "  But 
you  won't  forget  us,  mamma !"  said  she,  with  art- 
less simplicity :  "  Anna  and  I  shall  remember 
you,  as  Martin  says  we  should,  every  time  we 
say  our  prayers." 

To  hide  the  blush  of  contrition  which  spread 
itself  over  her  face,  Mrs.  Stanley  stooped  forward 
to  kiss  them  with  more  than  usual  affection  ;  tell- 
ing them,  "  they  were  very  good  girls,  and  that 
she  should  often  think  of  them." 

The  carriage  was  at  the  door,  and  Mr.  Stan- 
ley saw  them  lifted  into  it  with  the  utmost  indif- 
ference. Their  mother  stood  at  the  window ; 
and  as  she  kissed  her  hand  to  them  on  their 
driving  off,  she  felt  an  emotion  quite  new  to  her. 
When  she  considered  the  distance  which  would 
in  a  short  time  separate  her  from  her  children, 
and  the  sister  she  once  so  dearly  loved,  she 
thought  she  could  have  wept ;  but  in  the  hurry 
and  bustle  of  the  house,  and  the  visits  of  a  few 
friends,  who  came  to  discover  whether  the  report 
of  their  leaving  England  was  true  or  not,  that 
they  might  have  it  in  their  power  to  communicate 
it  to  others,  the  sensibility  so  new  to  her  was 
soon  worn  off,  and  self  again  became  the  chief 
object  of  her  attention. 

The  children  were  delighted  with  their  jour- 
ney ;  and  in  expressing  the  admiration  of  all  they 
saw,  even  their  fear  of  strangers  was  soon  forgot- 
ten, and  they  talked  without  restraint. 

"  Do  tell  me  the  name  of  the  place  we  are 


20  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

going  to,  Martin,"  said  Anna,  "for  I  have  for- 
gotten it  already." 

"Milwood,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin :  "but  I  don't 
know  how  you  will  like  it ;  there  are  no  houses 
to  be  seen,  no  carriages,  and  no  people  walking 
about,  as  there  are  in  London ;  the  country  is 
very  dull." 

"  Oh,  I  am  sure  we  shall  like  it,"  said  Ellen, 
with  great  eagerness  ;  "  for  we  have  seen  nothing 
but  houses  and  carriages,  and  such  things,  all  our 
lives.  Martin  says  the  country  is  full  of  fields 
and  trees  ;  and  that  we  shall  see  cows,  and  horses, 
and  sheep,  and  lambs.  Oh,  how  I  wish  to  be 
among  them !" 

Mrs.  Irvin  smiled  at  her  earnestness.  "  But," 
said  she,  "  do  you  think  you  will  have  nothing  to 
do  in  the  country  except  running  about?  You 
know  that  you  are  coming  to  my  house  to  learn  a 
great  many  things,  and  you  must  sit  within  a 
great  part  of  every  day,  and  work,  and  read,  and 
learn  lessons." 

"  Oh,  we  have  been  always  used  to  that,"  re- 
plied Ellen,  very  good-humoredly  ;  "  Martin  used 
to  make  us  do  so  at  home  :  this  pocket-handker- 
chief I  hemmed  all  myself ;  and  Anna  can  work 
much  better  than  I  can." 

"No,  sister,"  interrupted  Anna,  "indeed  I 
can't ;  and  you  know  you  can  read  and  spell  too 
better  than  I  can." 

"  I  am  pleased  to  see  such  an  affection  between 
these  children,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  addressing  her- 
self to  Martin,  who  praised  them  both  as  very 
good  young  ladies  ;  "  you  have  been  very  atten- 
tive to  them." 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  21 

Martin  answered  very  modestly,  that,  "  She 
thought  it  her  duty  to  teach  them  as  well  as  she 
could ;  but  I  know  very  little  myself,  ma'am," 
added  she. 

"  I  believe,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  "  you  know  more 
than  many  who  might  have  been  their  more  ac- 
complished instructers ;  for  I  think  you  have 
taught  them  their  duty  to  God,  and  to  love  each 
other." 

"  I  have  endeavored  to  do  so  ma'am,"  answer- 
ed Martin  ;  "  for  I  thought,  if  they  never  learned 
anything  else,  a  knowledge  of  their  duty  would 
make  them  feel  less  hurt  at  it," 

Mrs.  Irvin  was  much  pleased  with  this  obser- 
vation ;  it  seemed  above  the  sentiments  of  a  com- 
mon servant,  and  she  asked  her  from  whom  she 
had  learned  them. 

"  I  had  the  advantage  of  very  religious  parents, 
ma'am,"  said  Martin ;  "  and  they  always  taught 
me,  that  to  know  the  way  to  Heaven  was  far 
preferable  to  all  the  accomplishments  of  this  life." 

Mrs.  Irvin  perfectly  agreed  with  her,  and  re- 
joiced to  find  she  had  so  worthy  an  addition  to 
her  family. 

When  they  stopped  at  the  inn  at  which  they 
were  to  dine,  the  children  thought  they  were  at 
the  end  of  their  journey.  "  And  is  this  my  aunt's 
house  ?"  said  Ellen ;  "I  am  glad  we  are  here." 
Mrs.  Irvin  explained  their  mistake,  and  told  them 
they  had  still  a  great  way  to  go  after  dinner. 
This  meal  was  the  best  they  had  ever  tasted ; 
everything  was  good  ;  and  when  they  were  again 
seated  in  the  chaise,  they  repeatedly  declared 
that  "  this  was  the  happiest  day  of  their  lives." 


22  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

Thus  they  continued  to  chatter,  till  toward  the 
evening  they  began  to  grow  tired,  and  at  length 
each  fell  asleep  in  the  arms  of  their  companions  : 
nor  did  they  awake  when  the  carriage  stopped  at 
Mrs.  Irvin's  door.  A  bed  had  been  prepared  for 
them,  and  Martin  had  little  else  to  do  than  to  put 
them  into  it.  The  exercise  they  had  taken  that 
day  had  been  so  much  more  than  they  had  been 
accustomed  to,  that  not  even  their  curiosity  to  see 
their  aunt's  house  could  rouse  them  sufficiently  to 
make  any  inquiries  respecting  it. 

They  slept  all  night,  and  it  was  not  till  some 
time  after  their  usual  hour  that  their  eyes  were 
opened  the  next  morning  ;  but  when  Martin  had 
made  them  sensible  that  they  were  indeed  at  Mil- 
wood,  she  could  not  dress  them  quick  enough ; 
and  though  told  that  breakfast  was  waiting  for 
them,  the  prospect  from  their  chamber  window 
so  attracted  their  attention,  that  they  could  scarce- 
ly be  persuaded  to  leave  it.  It  was  the  largest 
and  prettiest  garden  they  had  ever  seen. — "  And 
is  it  really  my  aunt's  ?"  asked  Anna  ;  "  and  may 
we  walk  in  it  whenever  we  like  ?  I  am  sure 
there  is  not  such  a  pretty  place  all  over  London. 
Oh,  how  happy  we  shall  be  !"  Again  they  were 
told  that  breakfast  was  ready,  and  their  aunt  wait- 
ing. "  What !"  said  Ellen,  "  will  my  aunt  let  us 
breakfast  with  her  ?  How  good  !  we  never  break- 
fasted with  mamma." 

Martin,  as  she  conducted  them  down  stairs, 
was  full  of  her  instructions  respecting  their  be- 
havior at  the  breakfast-table  : — "  Remember,"  said 
she,  "  what  I  have  told  you,  and  don't  eat  too 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  23 

fast,  nor  spill  your  tea  ;  and  be  very  attentive  to 
all  your  aunt  says  to  you." 

They  entered  the  parlor,  and  found  their  aunt 
as  kind  as  ever.  She  kissed  them  both,  bidding 
them  welcome  to  Milwood  ;  but  their  attention 
seemed  entirely  engrossed  by  Mrs.  Irvin's  favor- 
ite dog,  who  was  endeavoring  by  every  way  in 
his  power  to  show  his  joy  at  the  return  of  his 
mistress  ;  he  walked  round  and  round  her  chair, 
wagged  his  tail,  and  kept  jumping  up  into  her  lap. 

"  What  is  the  matter  with  the  dog  V°  said  Ellen, 
half  afraid  ;  "  I  don't  like  him,  aunt !" 

"  Don't  you  ?"  replied  Mrs.  Irvin  :  "  now  I  do, 
for  he  does  that  to  show  his  gratitude  and  love 
for  me  ;  he  cannot  speak  as  you  and  I  can,  and 
this  is  his  way  of  telling  me  that  he  is  glad  to 
see  me.  Poor  Clio !"  added  she,  patting  him  on 
the  head,  "  lie  down,  my  dog ;"  and  he  instantly 
obeyed  her  order.  "  You  see,"  continued  she, 
"  there  is  no  reason  to  be  afraid  of  him  ;  if  you 
are  kind  to  him,  he  will  soon  be  as  fond  of  you." 

"  I  don't  think  I  should  like,  though,"  returned 
Ellen,  fearfully,  "  for  him  to  run  round  me  so ; 
suppose  he  should  bite  me  ?" 

"  Oh,  that  is  talking  foolishly,"  said  her  aunt ; 
"  look,  he  does  not  bite  me"  (putting  her  hand  to 
his  mouth,  which  he  licked  with  great  affection). 

"  I  like  the  dog  better  now,  aunt,"  said  Ellen, 
after  she  had  finished  her  breakfast,  and  saw  him 
still  lying  very  quietly  at  his  mistress's  feet ;  and, 
at  her  desire,  she  ventured  to  stroke  him  on  the 
back. 

Mrs.  Irvin  then  took  her  nieces  into  the  garden, 
where  thev  were  delighted  even  beyond  their  ex- 


24  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

pectation.  They  were,  like  the  dog,  at  a  loss 
how  to  express  their  pleasure  ;  they  ran  upon  the 
grass  and  jumped  for  joy. 

"Oh,  what  a  sweet  place!"  said  they ;  "we 
could  not  have  thought  it  was  half  so  pretty." — 
"And  what  beautiful  flowers!"  exclaimed  Anna, 
observing  the  blossoms  on  the  apple  and  cherry 
trees  ;  "  did  you  ever  see  anything  like  it,  sister ! 
flowers  to  grow  upon  such  large  trees !" 

"  Those,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  enjoying  their  plea- 
sure, "  will  all  be  fruit  in  a  few  months  ;  where 
you  see  flowers  now,  there  will  be  apples  and 
cherries ;  and  when  they  are  ripe  you  shall  eat 
some  of  them." 

"  Dear  !  dear  !"  said  Ellen,  "  how  many  there 
will  be  !  I  am  so  fond  of  apples,"  added  she, 
"  and  in  London  we  hardly  ever  had  one.  My 
dear  aunt,  how  much  obliged  we  are  to  you  !" 

Mrs.  Irvin  then  led  them  to  a  little  summer- 
house,  surrounded  by  shrubs  ;  where,  in  the  very 
warm  weather,  she  told  them,  "  they  should  sit 
and  work  with  her." 

They  again  expressed  their  joy  ;  and  on  their 
return  to  the  house,  ran  to  tell  Martin  all  the  plea- 
sures they  were  to  expect.  With  their  aunt's 
permission  they  led  Martin  likewise  round  the 
garden,  repeating  all  the  time  what  she  had  told 
them  respecting  the  apples  and  cherries  they 
were  soon  to  see  on  the  trees  which  they  so  much 
admired. 

"  My  dear  Martin,"  said  Anna,  as  she  jumped 
into  her  arms,  "  I  am  so  happy,  I  don't  know  what 
to  do  with  myself;  I  hope  you  are  so  too;    but 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  25 

you  don't  seem  half  so  much  pleased  as  we  are. 
I  am  afraid  you  are  sorry  to  leave  London." 

"  Not  at  all,  my  dear,''  said  the  affectionate  ser- 
vant ;  "lam  very  much  pleased  to  be  here  ;  but 
you  must  not  expect  such  an  old  woman  as  I  am 
to  skip  about  as  you  do." 

When  she  led  them  again  into  the  parlor,  she 
feared  they  would  be  quite  troublesome  to  their 
aunt,  unused  as  she  had  been  to  children.  "  The 
young  ladies  are  like  birds  let  out  of  a  cage,  mad- 
am," said  she  :  "I  am  afraid  they  will  make  too 
much  noise  for  you." 

Mrs.  Irvin  very  good-humoredly  made  every 
allowance  for  them  ;  and  giving  them  leave  to  go 
all  over  the  house,  and  return  to  her  when  they 
liked,  she  said,  "  we  must  let  them  recover  their 
senses  a  little  before  we  think  of  bringing  them 
into  any  order  ;  in  a  very  few  days  their  pleasure 
will  be  more  rational." 

"  How  good  my  aunt  is  !"  said  Ellen,  as  she 
went  up  stairs  with  Martin  ;  "  I  am  sure  we  would 
not  do  anything  to  disturb  her." 

When  left  to  herself,  Mrs.  Irvin  sat  down  to 
consider  in  what  way  she  should  best  fulfil  her 
promise  respecting  them  ;  and  she  determined  to 
have  no  masters  till  she  had  herself  instructed 
them  in  every  branch  of  their  education  as  far  as 
was  in  her  power.  She  next  examined  the  ac- 
count of  house-keeping  in  her  absence,  and  her 
weekly  provisions  for  the  neighboring  poor  who 
were  old  and  sick  ;  and  was  rejoiced  to  find  that, 
with  the  retrenchments  she  had  already  made,  she 
need  not  lessen  any  of  these  charitable  expenses, 
3 


26  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

to  fulfil  her  benevolent  intentions  toward  her 
nieces. 

The  next  day,  Mrs.  Irvin  took  the  little  girls  to 
visit  the  schools  which  she  had  established  in 
the  village.  This  was  quite  a  new  thing  to  them, 
to  see  so  many  children  all  employed,  and  they 
told  their  aunt  they  should  like  to  work  so  like- 
wise. Mrs.  Irvin  answered,  that  she  should  ex- 
pect them  to  be  equally  industrious  when  they 
began  school  with  her  at  home  :  "  And  now," 
said  she,  "  I  am  going  to  introduce  you  to  an  old 
friend  of  your  mamma's,  Mr.  Herbert,  who  knew 
her  when  she  was  a  very  little  girl." 

This  was  the  clergyman  of  the  parish,  who  had 
been  the  friend  of  Mr.  Irvin's  father,  and  contin- 
ued the  same  regard  to  his  children.  He  was  a 
very  worthy  man  ;  and,  on  being  told  that  the 
two  little  girls  he  now  saw  were  the  daughters  of 
his  once  favorite  Ellen,  he  received  them  with 
great  affection.  At  first  they  were  afraid  of  ap- 
proaching a  stranger  ;  but  his  kindness  insensi- 
bly removed  their  fears,  and  they  soon  became 
very  sociable.  He  asked  many  questions  re- 
specting their  mother,  which  Mrs.  Irvin  was  dis- 
tressed to  answer  ;  for  though  she  was  accustom- 
ed to  speak  openly  to  him,  she  did  not  like  before 
the  children  to  express  the  least  disapprobation 
of  their  parents'  conduct. 

On  their  return,  they  called  at  several  houses 
of  the  poor  inhabitants  of  the  village  ;  and  the 
little  girls  were  struck  with  the  appearance  of 
poverty  which  they  exhibited.  They  had  never 
seen  any  of  their  fellow-creatures  living  in  such 
misery,  and  it  seemed  to  make  a  deep  impression 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  27 

on  their  minds.  "  What  is  the  reason,  aunt," 
said  Ellen,  as  she  walked  thoughtfully  by  her 
side — "  Avhat  is  the  reason  that  these  poor  people 
have  hardly  any  clothes  to  wear,  while  some  have 
so  many  ?  Let  me  give  some  of  my  frocks  to  those 
poor  little  girls  I  have  seen  ;  I  am  sure  I  have 
a  great  many  more  than  I  want." — "  And  so  have 
I  too,"  said  Anna  ;  "  do  let  us  give  them  away." 

"  You  are  very  good,  my  dears,"  said  Mrs.  Ir- 
vin,  "  for  wishing  to  relieve  these  poor  people  ; 
but  at  present  it  is  not  in  your  power.  Did  you  not 
observe  what  very  coarse  things  they  had  on  ? 
very  different  from  what  you  wear  :  and  if  you 
were  to  give  them  your  muslin  frocks,  they  would 
be  of  no  use  to  them  ;  some  time  hence,  I  hope 
you  will  be  able  to  buy  what  will  suit  them  bet- 
ter. Perhaps,  if  you  wore  colored  frocks,  they 
might  do  to  give  away." 

"  Oh,  let  us  have  some,  then,"  said  they,  both 
together  ;  "  do,  pray,  aunt,  buy  us  some,  and  then 
we  shall  have  something  to  give  them,  and  they 
will  thank  us,  as  they  did  you  when  you  promis- 
ed to  send  them  some  broth." 

"  And  is  this  your  only  motive  for  wishing  to 
have  something  to  give  away — that  you  may  be 
thanked  for  it  ?"  said  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  this  is  a  very 
poor  reason  indeed,"  continued  she,  "  and  not  what 
I  expected  from  you.  I  praised  you  too  soon,  I  am 
afraid  :  your  charitable  expressions  arose  more 
from  pride  than  good-nature."  Perceiving  them 
still  silent,  she  continued  ;  "  but  even  then  your 
colored  frocks  would  not  be  your  own,  to  do  as 
you  liked  with  :  if  I  give  you  them  to  wear,  it  is 
my  money  which  must  buy  others  in  their  stead  ; 


28  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

and  if  I  buy  you  clothes  to  give  away,  it  will  be 
my  money,  and  not  yours,  which  paid  for  them, 
and  therefore  it  would  be  my  gift  rather  than 
yours  ;  yet  not  mine  either,"  added  she,  "  for  can- 
not you  tell  from  whom  all  our  good  things 
come  V 

"  Martin  says  they  come  from  God,"  said 
Ellen. 

"  Martin  is  very  right,"  replied  Mrs.  Irvin  : 
"  for  they  certainly  are  all  sent  from  Him  ;  and 
do  you  know  why  He  sends  them  to  us  in  such 
abundance  ?" 

"  That  we  may  do  good  with  them,  I  believe," 
answered  Ellen. 

"  Very  true,"  returned  her  aunt :  "  and  there- 
fore you  see  that  it  is  neither  you  nor  I  who  are 
to  be  thanked  for  what  we  give  away,  but  God, 
who  is  the  first  giver  of  it,  and  has  commanded 
us  to  make  this  use  of  it.  Do  you  understand 
what  I  mean  ?" 

"  Yes,  ma'am,"  said  Ellen,  blushing. 

"  Then  you  will  remember,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin, 
as  they  entered  the  garden-gate,  "  that  you  have 
as  much  reason  to  be  thankful  for  having  it  in  your 
power  to  relieve  others,  and  for  the  inclination  to 
do  so,  as  they  have  who  receive  any  benefit 
through  your  hands  :  and  it  is  to  God  you  should 
direct  their  thanks,  as  well  as  your  own.  You 
should  also  pray  to  Him,  that  you  may  never  grow 
proud  of  what  He  enables  you  to  do.  And  now 
let  me  kiss  both  my  dear  children,  for  it  is  to  both 
I  speak ;  and  then  you  may  play  in  the  garden 
till  dinner-time." 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  29 


CHAPTER  III. 

"  To  thee,  first  Father,  ceaseless  praise  ascend  ! 
And,  in  the  general  hymn,  u>y  grateful  voice 
Be  duly  heard."  Milton. 

The  next  day  was  Sunday.  Mrs.  Irvin  always 
rejoiced  at  the  return  of  the  Sabbath :  but  she 
was  grieved  to  hear  the  children  say  that  they 
had  never  been  to  church,  and  knew  not  how  to 
answer  all  their  various  questions,  so  as  to  im- 
press upon  their  minds  a  proper  sense  of  the  duty 
they  were  to  perform  there.  "  You  have  been 
used  to  say  your  prayers,"  said  she  ;  "  and  I  dare 
say  you  have  also  been  taught  that,  when  God 
made  the  world,  he  appointed  one  day  in  seven 
to  be  kept  holy  in  remembrance  of  it,  and  which 
we  should  devote  to  his  service  ;  for  this  purpose 
we  go  to  church,  where  we  say  our  prayers  with 
the  clergyman,  and  all  the  people  who  meet  to- 
gether ;  there  also  we  hear  the  Word  of  God,  and 
have  it  explained  to  us  ;  and  those  who  love  God 
are  always  very  sorry  when  they  cannot  attend 
at  his  house." 

"  But  who  is  the  clergyman  ?"  asked  Ellen, 
"  he  will  be  very  angry  if  we  don't  mind  what  he 
says." 

"  You  saw  him  yesterday,"  answered  Mrs.  Ir- 
vin— "  Mr.  Herbert.  But  you  should  remember 
it  is  to  God  you  are  praying,  and  it  is  his  Word 
which  Mr.  Herbert  reads  and  explains  to  us  ;  and 
3* 


30  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

therefore  it  is  God  we  should  be  fearful  of  offend- 
ing :  because  He  not  only  sees  all  you  do,  but 
also  knows  everything  you  think  of;  and  if,  while 
you  are  kneeling  down,  and  pretending  to  say 
your  prayers,  you  are  thinking  of  something  else, 
Mr.  Herbert  may  think  you  very  good  girls,  while 
God  will  be  justly  displeased  with  you  :  for  which 
reason,  if  you  do  not  promise  to  behave  very  at- 
tentively, I  do  not  think  I  can  take  you :  for  it 
would  be  an  offence  to  God." 

"  Oh,  we  will,  indeed  we  will,  my  dear  aunt !" 
said  they  both  in  one  voice  :  "if  you  will  but 
take  us,  we  will  be  very  good,  and  remember  all 
you  say." 

They  then  went  to  Martin,  impatient  to  be 
dressed,  telling  her  that  they  were  going  to 
church.  Martin  congratulated  them  on  it,  and 
added  her  strict  injunction  that  they  were  to  be 
very  attentive. 

When  the  bell  rang,  Mrs.  Irvin  called  her  young 
companions,  and  taking  each  by  the  hand,  she  led 
them  to  the  road,  where  they  met  the  children  of 
the  Sunday-school  coming  from  the  village.  "  Are 
all  those  little  boys  and  girls  going  to  church 
too  ?"  said  Anna  ;  "  and  these  men  and  women 
that  are  coming  the  other  way  1  Dear  !  dear ! 
how  many  people  we  shall  see  !" 

"  You  will  not  forget,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  "  that 
God  is  greater  than  all  these  people,  and  that  it 
is  of  Him  we  must  think :  you  are  not  going  to 
church  to  look  about  you,  but  to  learn  your  duty." 

She  spoke  rather  gravely,  as  she  wished  to  im- 
press them  with  a  serious  sense  of  the  service 
they  were  going  to  perform  ;  and  it  had  the  de- 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  31 

sired  effect :  for  when  they  entered  the  church, 
the  little  girls  forbore  to  notice  aloud  anything 
they  saw ;  and  though  all  was  so  new  to  them, 
they  entered  the  seat,  and  sat  quietly  till  the  ser- 
vice began,  when  they  were  very  attentive,  and 
joined  in  every  prayer  they  knew.  All  the  time 
of  the  sermon  they  kept  their  eye  on  Mr.  Her- 
bert, and  afterward  repeated  to  their  aunt  some 
things  he  said,  calculated  to  strike  their  minds. 

"  I  like  going  to  church  very  much,"  said  Ellen, 
"  and  hope  I  shall  soon  read  well  enough  to  carry 
a  book,  as  you  do,  aunt ;  then  I  shall  know  better 
what  Mr.  Herbert  is  saying." 

"  I  am  very  glad  to  hear  you  say  so,  my  dear 
child,"  replied  Mrs.  Irvin ;  "  for  it  is  certainly  a 
very  great  privilege  to  be  allowed  to  join  in  prayer 
with  the  best  of  God's  servants,  and  a  still  greater 
one  to  speak  to  God  himself.  When  you  con- 
sider," added  she,  "how  many  poor  creatures 
there  are  in  the  world  who  know  not  the  God 
who  made  them — and  some  in  this  Christian 
land,  as  it  is  called,  may,  I  am  afraid,  be  found — 
you  ought  to  be  doubly  thankful  that  you  are  so 
early  taught  the  blessings  you  enjoy,  and  to  pray 
for  them,  that  they  also  may  know  them." 

Before  their  dinner-hour  they  visited  the  Sun- 
day-school with  their  aunt,  and  heard  some  of  the 
girls  read,  and  repeat  the  Catechism.  Here  also 
they  saw  Mr.  Herbert,  who  constantly  attended 
both  the  boys'  and  girls'  school  every  Sunday. 
He  commended  the  children  for  their  good  be- 
havior at  church,  and  as  he  walked  home  with 
Mrs.  Irvin,  it  gave  her  pleasure  to  observe  the 
attention  which  both  her  nieces  paid  to  what  he 


32  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

said  on  having  seen  them  at  church,  and  what 
ought  to  be  their  sentiments  on  going  there  for 
the  first  time.  In  the  afternoon  they  all  met  at 
church  again ;  and  when  they  came  home,  Mrs. 
Irvin  read  to  them  such  a  part  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment as  she  thought  most  likely  to  interest  them, 
and  explained  the  instructions  it  contained.  She 
afterward  gave  them  Dr.  Watts's  first  Catechism 
for  Children,  which  they  were  to  learn  so  as  to 
answer  the  questions  the  next  Sunday.  After 
tea,  they  went  for  a  walk  ;  during  which  she  re- 
peated to  them  two  or  three  hymns  of  that  excel- 
lent author,  so  deservedly  a  favorite  with  all 
children  ;  and  with  these  they  were  so  delighted, 
that  they  begged  they  might  also  learn  them  ;  and 
while  Martin  was  putting  them  to  bed  that  even- 
ing, they  were  full  of  the  goodness  of  their  aunt, 
and  telling  her  what  she  had  promised  to  teach 
them. 

The  next  morning,  Mrs.  Irvin  began  upon  the 
plan  she  had  formed  for  their  education.  She 
told  them  that,  at  their  age,  most  children  in  their 
station  knew  a  great  deal  more  than  they  did,  and 
therefore  it  was  necessary  for  them  to  exert  all 
their  diligence  to  learn  whatever  she  desired.  In 
the  first  place,  she  expected  them  to  rise  at  seven 
every  morning,  (an  hour  earlier  than  they  had 
been  accustomed  to,)  and  be  at  their  lessons  be- 
fore eight,  which  were  such  as  they  could  very 
easily  learn  in  half  an  hour  :  when  they  were 
perfect  in  them,  they  were  to  come  to  breakfast ; 
after  which,  they  might  play  in  the  garden,  or 
walk  with  Martin,  with  whom  she  often  sent  them 
on  some  charitable  errand  to  the  poor  in  the  vil- 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  33 

lage,  till  ten  o'clock ;  at  which  time  they  were  to 
return  to  her,  and  repeat  the  lessons  they  had 
learned  before  breakfast,  and  to  employ  the  rest 
of  the  morning  in  reading,  writing,  and  working, 
according  to  her  direction.  Mrs.  Irvin  was  very 
fond  of  music,  and  was  herself  a  proficient  in  it. 
and  some  part  of  every  day  she  employed  in  teach- 
ing them  the  notes.  She  also  read  to  them,  and 
accustomed  them  to  answer  the  questions  which 
arose  from  what  they  heard. 

Before  they  left  their  aunt,  to  be  dressed  for 
dinner,  they  a  second  time  repeated  their  lessons, 
which  were  short  and  adapted  to  their  capacities  ; 
and  by  this  method  these  first  instructions  were 
imprinted  on  their  memories.  Neither  did  Mrs. 
Irvin  forget  the  more  important  lessons  of  religion, 
while  teaching  them  things  belonging  to  this 
world  only.  The  Catechisms  she  had  given  them 
were  daily  repeated ;  and  when  perfect  in  them, 
she  put  into  their  hands  the  excellent  one  of  our 
church.  With  so  strict  an  attention,  in  a  very 
little  time  they  began  to  know  something  of  the 
different  things  in  which  it  was  necessary  that 
they  should  be  instructed.  In  the  familiar  les- 
sons of  Mrs.  Trimmer  and  Mrs.  Barbauld,  those 
good  friends  of  youth,  was  given  them  a  general 
idea  of  the  works  of  God ;  and,  with  the  kind  at- 
tention of  their  excellent  instructress,  who  im- 
proved every  advantage  which  books  could  afford, 
their  minds  expanded,  and  they  found  the  pleasure 
there  is  in  receiving  instruction. 

Great  was  the  happiness  of  Mrs.  Irvin,  while 
these  dear  children  seemed  to  answer  all  her 
love,  and  while  her  most  pleasing  expectations 


34  THE  TWIN-  SISTERS. 

concerning  them  were  not  disappointed.  They 
were  every  day  more  endeared  to  their  aunt ;  nor 
were  they  less  attached  to  her,  who  thus  early 
taught  them  to  look  with  prayer  to  the  Almighty 
for  assistance  in  all  their  endeavors  ;  and  in  every- 
thing they  learned,  they  were  also  taught  to  as- 
cribe to  Him  the  praise,  who  had  thus  blessed 
their  endeavors  to  become  wise  and  good. 

In  this  way  the  children  went  on  for  several 
months,  improving  every  day ;  when,  as  they 
were  one  morning  returning  from  their  walk  into 
the  village,  whither  their  aunt  had  sent  them  with 
Martin  to  distribute  some  of  her  usual  benefac- 
tions, they  passed  by  a  neat  cottage,  with  whose 
inhabitant  they  were  not  so  well  acquainted  as 
with  many  others,  though  they  had  often  admired 
the  flowers  which  grew  in  the  little  garden  be- 
fore it,  and  had  heard  their  aunt  say  she  was  a 
very  good  old  woman  who  lived  in  it.  As  they 
knew  she  had  no  children,  they  were  now  sur- 
prised to  see  a  little  girl  sitting  near  the  door,  and 
talking  to  another  who  was  gathering  flowers  at 
a  little  distance. 

"  How  sweet  the  garden  smells  !"  said  she  ;  "  I 
am  sure  there  must  be  a  great  many  flowers  in  it, 
and  I  wish  I  could  see  them !  O  Betsy,  I  am 
so  glad  to  be  here,  you  can't  think :  will  you  lead 
me  down  to  the  lilach-tree  ?  I  should  like  to  sit 
there,  as  I  did  yesterday." 

"To  be  sure  I  will,"  answered  the  other ;  and 
running  to  her,  she  took  her  by  the  hand,  and,  at 
the  same  time  carrying  the  chair  on  which  she 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  35 

sat,  she  led  her  down  the  path  to  the  side  of  the 
road. 

"  Who  can  these  little  girls  be  ?"  said  Ellen  ; 
"  I  never  saw  them  before." 

"  Hush  !"  said  Martin  :  "lam  afraid  that  poor 
child  is  blind ;  if  so,  how  much  I  pity  her !" 

As  they  were  concealed  in  the  hedge  behind 
which  they  stood,  the  children  did  not  observe 
them,  but  continued  their  conversation  : — "  You 
will  not  mind  being  left  alone  for  a  little  while  ?" 
said  Betsy,  very  affectionately,  to  her  sister  ;  "  for 
you  know  I  must  go  in  and  help  mother  ;  but  per- 
haps Dame  Hunt  will  come  to  you ;  shall  I  ask 
her  ?" 

"  No,  no,"  said  the  little  girl ;  "  I  dare  say  she 
is  busy  about  something  or  another ;  I  only  am 
idle.  Oh,  how  I  wish  I  could  do  something!" 
added  she  with  a  sigh ;  "  but  I  cannot  see." 

"  Poor  thing !"  said  Ellen,  in  a  low  voice  ; 
"  she  is  blind  then :  what  can  we  do  for  her  ? 
Let  us  speak  to  her"  (drawing  nearer  to  the  place 
where  she  sat)  ;  but  Martin,  who  had  more 
thought,  whispered  to  them,  "  that,  as  she  was 
now  alone,  it  might  frighten  her  to  be  addressed 
by  strangers  :"  and  they  gave  up  the  idea.  "  But 
we  will  tell  my  aunt,"  said  Anna ;  "I  am  sure 
she  will  come  and  see  her." 

At  this  moment  the  church  clock  struck  ten, 
and  they  hurried  home  to  be  in  time  for  their  les- 
sons. They  were  eager  also  to  communicate  to 
their  aunt  what  they  had  seen;  nor  could  the 
business  of  the  morning  be  attended  to,  till  she 
had  promised  to  go  to  the  cottage  in  the  afternoon, 
and  take  them  with  her. 


36  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

The  moment  they  had  dined  they  were  impatient 
to  set  out  on  their  expedition,  but  were  prevented 
by  the  rain.  Poor  Ellen  could  not  help  complain- 
ing very  bitterly  of  the  weather  : — "  Is  it  not  too 
bad  ?"  said  she  ;  "  I  should  not  have  minded  it,  if 
we  had  been  only  going  for  a  walk ;  but  for  the 
sake  of  the  poor  little  girl  I  wanted  to  go ;  is  it 
not  hard,  aunt,"  continued  she,  "  that  we  are  pre- 
vented ?  for,  I  am  sure  you  would  have  given  her 
something ;  and  now  she  will  not  have  it." 

"  You  forget,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  very  coolly, 
"  that  it  may  not  rain  to-morrow  ;  and  that  what 
I  have  to  give  her  will  be  quite  as  acceptable 
then  as  now  :  besides,  as  she  does  not  know  of 
our  intention,  it  can  be  no  disappointment  to  her." 

Still  Ellen  could  not  help  repeatedly  wishing 
it  would  not  rain  ;  and  when  her  aunt  asked  her 
to  read,  as  they  could  not  get  out,  it  was  with 
great  unwillingness  she  obeyed.  Her  sister  in- 
vited her  to  come  and  play  with  her  ;  but  she  con- 
tinued to  sit  in  the  window,  lamenting  the  weather, 
till  Mrs.  Irvin  again  spoke  to  her. 

"  I  cannot  help  it,"  said  Ellen ;  "  I  wish  it 
would  not  rain." 

"  You  behave  very  ill,"  replied  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  do 
you  not  know  who  sends  the  rain,  and  for  what 
purpose  ?  It  will  be  of  much  greater  benefit  than 
jmr  visit  to  the  cottage.  Perhaps  you  may  ima- 
gine that  you  are  showing  great  good-nature  to 
the  little  girl  you  wish  to  see  ;  but  remember  it  is 
still  more  your  duty  to  submit  to  the  will  of  God 
in  everything,  and  that,  even  in  such  a  trifle  as 
this  appears  to  be,  He  is  as  attentive  to  your  con 
duct  as  in  more  material  trials." 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  37 

Ellen  did  not  feel  what  was  said,  but  went  out 
of  the  room  to  seek  her  sister,  who  again  pressed 
her  to  come  and  play  : — "  Never  mind  the  weath- 
er," said  she;  "you  know  we  may  go  to-mor- 
row." 

But  without  attending  to  her  advice,  Ellen  con- 
tinued her  murmurs.  "  I  do  not  see  my  aunt  has 
any  reason  to  be  angry  with  me,"  said  she  ;  "  I 
am  sure  it  is  not  for  myself  I  wished  to  go  :  there 
is  not  so  much  pleasure  in  going  to  the  cottage, 
as  in  walking  any  other  way ;  it  must  be  for  the 
sake  of  the  little  girl." 

"  But  why  should  you  be  sorry,  if  we  cannot 
go  ?"  asked  Anna :  "  my  aunt  will  take  us  to- 
morrow." 

With  this  thought,  Ellen  began  in  some  mea- 
sure to  recover  her  good  humor  ;  yet,  before  the 
conclusion  of  the  evening,  she  met  with  another 
trial  of  her  patience,  which,  as  her  mind  was  so 
ill  prepared  for  it,  she  bore  still  worse  than  the 
present.  Martin  had  promised  to  make  her  doll 
a  new  bonnet,  and  on  this  day  it  was  to  have 
been  finished  ;  but  the  idea  of  visiting  the  cottage 
had  so  occupied  Ellen's  mind  all  the  day,  that  it 
had  not  once  entered  her  head,  till  now,  being 
persuaded  by  her  sister  to  join  her  in  play,  when 
she  came  to  dress  her  doll,  she  recollected  the 
bonnet  was  wanting,  and  ran  with  eagerness  to 
inquire  of  Martin  if  it  was  made.  Unfortunately, 
she  found  her  quite  differently  employed ;  in- 
stead of  working  for  her  doll,  she  was  busily  en- 
gaged in  making  some  clothes  for  a  poor  child  in 
the  village. 

"  I  hope  you  will  not  be  angry  with  me,  Miss," 
4 


38  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

said  she,  "  but  indeed  I  have  not  had  time  even 
to  begin  it ;  for  when  I  promised  you  should  have 
it  to-day,  I  did  not  know  I  should  have  this  shirt 
and  frock  to  make  ;  your  aunt  gave  them  to  me 
the  other  day,  and  the  poor  boy  has  nothing  to 
wear  till  they  are  done." 

"  Well,  I  declare,  I  never  knew  anything  like 
it !"  said  Ellen  ;  "  I  can't  have  anything  I  wish 
to-day :  I  am  sure  it  would  not  have  taken  up 
much  of  your  time  to  have  made  my  doll's  bon- 
net !  you  know  you  promised  it  me,  and  I  must 
say  I  think  it  very  hard." 

"  Oh !  Miss  Ellen,  don't  say  so,"  replied  Mar- 
tin;  "I  am  sure  you  cannot  think  it  of  as  much 
consequence  as  clothes  for  this  poor  boy  :  I  will 
make  it  as  soon  as  ever  I  have  finished  for  him." 

"  But  I  want  it  now,"  said  Ellen,  violently 
angry ;  "  and  you  ought  to  have  made  it ;  and  I 
know  very  well  you  never  will — you  never  in- 
tend to  do  it ;  you  will  always  have  some  excuse 
or  other." 

In  this  way  she  was  talking,  when  she  heard 
her  aunt's  voice  behind  her  : — "  What  is  the  mat- 
ter ?"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  observing  Ellen's  angry 
countenance  :  "  you  were  speaking  in  a  very  im- 
proper tone,  and  I  see  by  your  looks  you  have 
behaved  ill." 

Ellen  was  silent,  and  ashamed  of  being  seen 
by  her  aunt  in  so  ill  a  humor :  she  was  going  out 
of  the  room,  but  Mrs.  Irvin  commanded  her  to 
stay,  and  again  asked  Martin  to  explain  the  cause 
of  her  behavior.  At  first  she  did  not  like  to 
speak  ;  but  upon  Mrs.  Irvin's  insisting  on  know- 
ing, she  owned  that  Miss  Ellen  had  been  very 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  d9 

angry  with,  her,  because  she  had  not  made  her 
doll  a  bonnet  at  the  time  appointed,  instead  of 
finishing  the  clothes  for  the  poor  boy,  who  so 
much  wanted  them. 

Ellen  held  down  her  head ;  when  her  aunt  ex- 
pressed great  sorrow  on  hearing  this  account ; 
and  taking  her  niece  by  the  hand,  she  led  her  to 
the  parlor,  where  in  the  most  affectionate  manner 
she  endeavored  to  convince  her  of  the  impropriety 
of  her  conduct.  "  My  dear  child,"  said  she, 
"  you  can  no  longer  imagine  that  your  impatience 
to  visit  the  cottage  this  afternoon  proceeded  from 
good-nature  or  benevolence  ;  it  was  because  your 
curiosity  was  raised,  and  you  wished  to  know 
who  were  the  little  girls  you  had  seen  there  :  but 
if  it  had  proceeded  from  a  charitable  wish,  is  it 
not  evident  that,  so  far  from  being  angry  with 
Martin  for  not  having  made  a  bonnet  for  your  doll, 
you  would  have  been  pleased  she  had  not  spent 
her  time  upon  such  a  trifle,  when  she  was  so 
much  better  employed  !  Every  day  that  this  poor 
boy  has  to  wait  for  his  clothes,  he  cannot  go  to 
school,  neither  can  he  go  out  to  work ;  so  that 
you  see  it  is  not  like  our  visit  to  the  cottage,  a 
matter  of  indifference  whether  it  is  one  day  soon- 
er or  later ;  and  yet  you  could  have  wished  him 
to  have  waited  still  longer,  that  you  might  have 
had  a  trifling  plaything.  Are  you  not  sorry  for 
this  ?"  added  she,  observing  the  tears  stealing- 
down  the  face  of  the  softened  Ellen. 

"  Yes,  indeed  I  am,"  said  Ellen,  as  well  as 
her  sobs  would  allow  her  to  speak  ;  "  I  am  in- 
deed ;  I  will  never  be  so  cross  again.  But  are 
hot  you  displeased  with  me,  my  dear  aunt  ?"  added 


40  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

she,  greatly  distressed ;  "  what  shall  I  do  if 
you  are  1  I  never  offended  you  before  ;  but  I 
know  I  deserve  your  anger." 

"  No,  my  dear,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  tenderly  em- 
bracing her  ;  "  if  you  are  sorry  for  your  fault,  I 
can  no  longer  be  angry  with  you  :  you  did  not 
see  things  in  this  light  before  ;  but  let  what  I 
have  now  said  convince  you  of  the  necessity 
there  is  of  always  examining  the  motives  from 
which  we  act.  You  are  but  young  at  present, 
and  may  not  always  understand  what  I  mean  ; 
but  as  you  grow  older,  you  are  likely  to  be  often 
deceived  in  this  manner  ;  while  you  think  you 
are  showing  a  very  good  disposition,  it  is  only 
some  vain  or  trifling  passion  you  wish  to  grat- 
ify :  as,  in  the  instance  of  this  afternoon,  you  may 
be  sure  it  was  only  curiosity  that  influenced  you, 
or  you  would  not  have  been  so  angry  when  a 
work  of  charity  interfered  with  your  pleasure." 

Ellen  readily  acknowledged  her  mistake  ;  and 
the  tenderness  of  her  aunt  was  so  clearly  seen  in 
the  mildness  of  her  reproofs,  that  by  this  man- 
ner she  gained  more  ascendency  over  the  minds 
of  her  nieces  than  if  she  had  severely  punished 
them  for  every  fault.  It  was  indeed  by  the  cords 
of  affection  that  she  bound  them  to  herself :  and 
by  thus  reasoning  with  them  on  their  general  con- 
duct, she  laid  the  foundation  of  their  future  hap- 
piness, by  teaching  them  to  bring  all  their  actions 
to  this  unerring  test :  whether  the  motive,  as  well 
as  the  action  itself,  was  such  as  would  be  ap^ 
proved  by  God. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  41 


CHAPTER   IV. 

"  When  heaven-born  Charity 
Expands  the  heart,  and  prompts  the  liberal  hand 
To  sooth  distress."  Bowdler. 

The  next  morning  Mrs.  Irvin  proposed  going 
into  the  village,  and  calling  at  Dame  Hunt's  in 
her  way  home.  Ellen  felt  conscious  of  not  de- 
serving to  go  with  her ;  but  her  fears  were  soon 
removed  by  her  aunt's  telling  her,  as  well  as  her 
sister,  to  get  ready  to  accompany  her. 

After  they  had  visited  the  school,  and  called  on 
two  or  three  old  and  sick  people,  they  went  to 
the  cottage,  where,  instead  of  the  children  they 
had  seen  the  day  before,  a  woman  of  very  decent 
appearance,  but  looking  very  ill,  was  walking  in 
the  garden  ;  and  as  they  approached  the  house, 
she  opened  the  gate  that  led  to  it.  Mrs.  Irvin 
asked  if  Dame  Hunt  was  within,  and  was  follow- 
ed by  the  stranger  up  the  walk,  who  appeared  to 
have  scarcely  strength  to  answer  her  questions. 

"  I  am  afraid  you  are  not  well,"  said  Mrs.  Ir- 
vin, very  kindly  :   "  have  you  been  long  ill  ?" 

"  Some  time,  ma'am,"  answered  she — "  trouble 
has  brought  me  to  this  ill  state  of  health." 

At  this  moment  the  old  woman  came  to  the 
door,  and  without  regarding  the  company,  she 
cried  out,  "  Oh,  Mrs.  Forbes,  make  haste  and 
come  in  ;  I  do  believe  your  child  is  almost  dead  !" 

"  What  do  you  mean  ?"  said  the  poor  woman, 
4* 


42  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

exerting  all  her  strength  to  reach  the  house  :  "  not 
my  poor  Mary,  I  hope  ?" 

"  No,  my  dear  mother,"  cried  a  voice  from 
within  ;  "  pray  don't  be  frightened  ;  indeed  I  am 
not  much  hurt." 

Mrs.  Irvin  was  now  within  the  door,  where  she 
saw  the  poor  little  girl  her  nieces  had  mentioned, 
lying  on  the  floor,  with  her  face  and  neck  cover- 
ed with  blood. 

"  Oh,  what  is  the  matter  V  said  the  affrighted 
mother  ;  "  how  did  this  happen  ?  my  dear  Mary, 
what  shall  I  do  for  you  ?"  and  weakened  by  ill- 
ness and  alarm,  she  burst  into  tears. 

Mrs.  Irvin  hardly  knew  which  to  assist  first ; 
but  with  her  usual  composure,  she  desired  the  old 
woman  to  get  some  water  for  Mrs.  Forbes,  while 
she  raised  the  poor  child  from  the  ground  ;  who, 
on  hearing  her  mother's  sobs,  was  still  more  dis- 
tressed, and  attempting  to  move,  she  said,  "  My 
dear  mother,  where  are  you  ?  I  am  not  hurt,  in- 
deed I  am  not ;  pray  don't  cry  so  ; — let  me  come 
to  you,"  added  she,  stretching  out  her  arms  ; 
"  where  are  you  ?  and  who  is  here  beside  you  ?" 

"  Here  are  none  but  friends,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin, 
kindly  taking  her  hand  and  leading  her  towa.rd 
her  mother  ;  "  3vOur  mother  is  only  frightened ; 
but  you  must  set  her  a  better  example  ;  and  when 
we  have  washed  your  face,  and  put  something 
over  this  slight  wound  in  your  forehead,  you  will 
be  quite  well  again." 

The  poor  woman  now  began  to  recover  herself, 
and  rose  to  help  her  child.  "  How  good  you  are, 
ma'am  !"  said  she  ;  "  I  am  sure  you  take  too  much 
trouble  about  us  :  but  indeed  I  was  so  frightened 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  43 

at  first,  that  even  now  I  am  fit  for  nothing ;  my 
dear  child,  I  can  do  nothing  for  you  :"  and  on  ob- 
serving the  deep  cut  in  her  forehead,  she  again 
burst  into  tears.  "  You  are  needlessly  alarmed," 
said  Mrs.  Irvin,  as  she  wiped  the  little  girl's  face  ; 
"  it  is  but  a  very  small  wound  ;  but  Dame  Hunt 
was  very  unguarded  to  alarm  you  as  she  did." 

"  Why,  my  dear  heart  alive,  ma'am,"  said  the 
old  woman,  "  if  you  had  but  seen  the  poor  child  ; 
she  did  not  say  a  word,  but  there  she  lay  all  as  if 
she  was  dead,  and  the  blood  gushing  out  so  !  I 
only  went  up  stairs  to  fetch  something  I  wanted, 
and  she  was  sitting  very  quietly,  and  out  of  the 
way  of  everything  ;  but  when  I  came  back,  there 
was  she  lying  upon  the  floor,  all  over  blood,  and 
the  two  iron  candlesticks  upon  her." 

"  How  came  you  there,  my  dear  ?"  said  Mrs. 
Irvin  ;  "  you  should  not  have  moved  without  any- 
body in  the  room." 

"  My  sister  Betsy  is  gone  out,  ma'am,"  an- 
swered the  little  girl ;  "  and  I  thought  that  I 
would  try  and  cut  some  paper,  for  I  very  often 
employ  myself  in  that  manner ;  and  as  I  knew 
mother  was  in  the  garden,  and  Betsy  had  told  me 
that  the  scissors  and  paper  were  upon  the  shelf, 
I  thought  I  would  get  up  and  feel  along  it  till  I 
found  what  I  wanted ;  but  I  did  not  know  that 
the  candlesticks  were  there,  and  I  believe  I  pushed 
them  down,  and  that  frightened  me  so  that  I  fell 
down  myself,  and  they  cut  my  face  a  little.  When 
Dame  Hunt  came  in,  I  could  not  speak  directly ; 
but  I  little  thought  she  would  call  my  dear  mother, 
and  frighten  her." 

'  I  am  much  better  now,  my  dear,"  said  Mrs. 


44  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

Forbes,  advancing  to  her,  and  wishing  to  take  the 
trouble  from  Mrs.  Irvin,  who  was  still  washing 
the  forehead  of  the  child.  Ellen  and  Anna  had 
stood  all  the  time  in  silent  affright,  not  knowing 
what  to  do  ;  but  still  they  wished  to  assist  the 
poor  little  girl ;  and  when  she  was  again  seated, 
they  each  went,  and  taking  her  hand,  inquired 
how  she  felt  herself. 

"  These  are  two  little  girls  that  came  with  me," 
said  Mrs.  Irvin ;  "  they  wished  to  help  you  if 
they  could." 

The  little  stranger  seemed  much  pleased  with 
their  attention,  and  answered  all  their  inquiries 
with  great  civility.  Mrs.  Irvin  now  asked  how 
long  they  had  been  in  the  neighborhood,  and 
what  had  brought  them  there  !  And  from  Mrs. 
Forbes's  account  she  learned  that  she  had  expe- 
rienced great  troubles,  particularly  after  the  death 
of  her  husband,  who  died  just  as  he  had  entered 
on  a  very  good  business  at  Rochester,  in  which 
his  own  endeavors  and  the  kindness  of  his  friends 
seemed  to  promise  him  success,  till  his  ill  state 
of  health  damped  all  their  comforts.  They  had 
married  very  young  ;  and  their  parents  dying  soon 
after,  they  were  much  distressed,  till,  by  the  ad- 
vice of  their  friends,  they  took  to  the  business 
above  mentioned.  Soon  after  they  were  married, 
they  had  these  two  children,  the  youngest  of  whom 
had  been  blind  from  two  years  old.  When  her 
husband  died,  Mrs.  Forbes  thought  it  too  great  an 
undertaking  to  continue  the  business,  particularly 
as  she  feared  her  own  health  began  to  decline  ; 
and  therefore,  as  soon  as  she  could,  she  disposed 
of  the  stock,  of  which,  as  they  had  begun  trade 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  45 

in  confined  circumstances,  the  first  expenses  were 
not  entirely  paid  off;  and  when  all  came  to  be 
settled,  she  found  she  had  little  else  to  depend  on 
for  the  support  of  herself  and  children  but  her 
own  industry.  She  then  commenced  mantua- 
making,  and  took  in  plain  work  ;  but  with  her  ut- 
most exertions  she  found  it  very  difficult  to  gain 
a  livelihood.  One  poor  child  could  do  nothing  to 
assist  her,  and  nearly  all  the  time  of  the  other 
was  occupied  in  attending  on  her  sister.  In  ad- 
dition to  all  this,  the  poor  widow  found  her  health 
daily  declining  ;  her  work  failed  her,  and  she  was 
often  in  want  of  absolute  necessaries,  till  at  length 
a  charitable  friend  offered  to  pay  for  having  medi- 
cal advice  :  her  complaint  was  declared  consump- 
tive, and  nothing  but  a  change  of  air  was  likely 
to  remove  it.  She  was  much  alarmed  on  hearing 
this ;  and  the  dread  of  leaving  her  children  so 
young  and  helpless,  made  here  extremely  anxious 
to  follow  this  advice.  The  same  kind  friend  who 
at  first  procured  the  attendance  of  a  physician  for 
her,  now  offered  to  do  all  in  her  power  to  assist 
her  in  the  expenses  of  her  removal ;  and  as  Dame 
Hunt  was  a  relation  of  her  husband  whom  she 
had  often  visited  in  his  lifetime,  she  thought  of 
coming  to  her  cottage,  where,  she  flattered  her- 
self, she  should  soon  regain  her  health,  and  be 
able  to  do  something  which  should  prevent  her 
being  burdensome  to  the  poor  old  woman ;  and 
she  immediately  wrote  her  a  letter,  describing 
her  situation,  and  begging  to  be  admitted  into  her 
house  for  a  short  time.  On  receiving  this  letter, 
no  selfish  idea  entered  the  mind  of  Dame  Hunt ; 
such  as,  it  was  likely  this  poor  woman  would  die, 


46  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

and  then  the  children  would  be  left  to  her  care : 
she  had  studied  her  Bible,  and  there  she  learned, 
that,  "  He  that  hath  pity  upon  the  poor,  lendeth 
unto  the  Lord ;"  and  that,  "  whatsoever  he  doeth, 
it  shall  be  recompensed  upon  him." 

"  These  people  are  poorer  than  I,"  said  she  to 
herself;  "  and  surely  it  is  my  duty  to  help  them 
all  I  can."  She  therefore  sent  for  the  schoolmas- 
ter to  come  and  write  her  a  letter,  that  she  might 
send  to  Mrs.  Forbes,  "  and  tell  her  to  come  as 
soon  as  ever  she  liked."  Though  blunt  in  her 
manners,  Dame  Hunt  had  a  feeling  heart ;  and 
when  she  saw  the  miserable  appearance  of  this 
dejected  family,  still  more  so  from  a  long  and 
fatiguing  journey,  with  little  or  no  accommodation 
on  the  road,  she  could  not  refrain  from  tears. 
They  stopped  at  the  door  of  the  cottage  about 
seven  o'clock  in  the  evening,  in  a  little  cart  which 
had  been  hired  by  the  friend  already  spoken  of  to 
convey  them  thither ;  and  when  she  saw  their 
helpless  appearance,  she  exclaimed  with  pity, 
"  Poor  creatures,  how  ill  they  look  !  come  in,  and 
welcome  ; — sure,  sure,  I  never  thought  to  see  you 
so !  but  '  the  Lord  taketh  up,  and  casteth  down.' 
How  well  I  remember  when  Tom  Forbes,  as  we 
used  to  call  him,  came  down  here  the  last  time  ! 
why,  he  looked  like  a  gentleman  ;  but  now  he  is 
gone,  and  my  poor  old  Gaffer  is  dead  also.  But 
do  not  fear,  my  good  woman,"  added  she,  observ- 
ing Mrs.  Forbes  shed  tears  at  the  mention  of  her 
husband ;  "  all  is  for  the  best ;  and,  upon  my 
word,  I  be  glad  to  see  you ;  and,  as  I  told  you  in 
my  letter,  you  shall  be  welcome  to  stay  as  long 
as  you  like.     I  have  got  victuals  enow  for  you 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  47 

and  myself  too,  God  be  thanked  for  it !"  Such 
was  the  reception  this  good  old  woman  gave  her 
distressed  kinswoman  ;  and  on  hearing  the  recital 
of  their  misfortunes,  which  Mrs.  Forbes  now  gave 
to  Mrs.  Irvin,  she  renewed  her  promises  of  assist- 
ance as  far  as  she  was  able,  and  again  repeated 
her  hearty  declarations  of  welcome. 

Mrs.  Irvin  soon  after  took  her  leave,  and  put- 
ting half  a  crown  into  Mrs.  Forbes's  hand,  pro- 
mised to  call  again  very  soon.  As  they  walked 
home,  she  was  anxious  to  consider  in  what  way 
she  could  be  most  serviceable  to  this  family  ;  and 
first,  the  poor  woman  herself  seemed  most  to 
want  her  assistance,  whose  health,  she  hoped,  by 
strengthening  food  and  good  nursing,  might  be  re- 
covered. Ellen  and  Anna  could  think  or  talk  of 
nothing  else.  "  Oh,  how  bad  it  must  be  to  be 
blind  !"  said  Anna  ;  "  what  should  we  do,  sister, 
if  either  of  us  were  so  V1 

"  I  cannot  think,"  answered  Ellen  :  "  and  then 
the  poor  woman  so  ill  too ! — I  did  not  like  Dame 
Hunt  at  first,  for  calling  out  and  frightening  her 
so  ;  but  afterward  I  did, — she  seems  such  a  good 
old  woman." 

"  Indeed  she  is,"  replied  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  I  wish 
we  had  all  the  same  dispositions.  To  be  sure, 
she  wanted  discretion  in  saying  so  abruptly  that 
the  child  was  dead,  and  alarming  the  poor  mother  : 
but  perhaps  there  are  some  who  would  think  she 
showed  a  greater  want  of  it,  when  she  took  three- 
people  into  her  house  in  the  circumstances  these 
are  in ;  but  I  like  her  much  the  better  for  it,  and 
shall  always  respect  her  for  such  hearty  benevo- 
lence !  for  though  she  talks  of  what  she  has  as 


48  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

being  enough  for  all,  I  know  it  is  not  what  many- 
people,  even  in  her  situation,  would  think  sufficient 
for  one  person  to  live  comfortably  on.  Do  you  not 
now  see,"  continued  Mrs.  Irvin,  addressing  Ellen, 
"  that  our  going  this  morning  is  much  better  than 
last  night  1  for  now  we  are  able  to  assist  the  little 
girls  in  more  ways  than  by  giving  them  money ; 
and  in  all  probability^ the  poor  woman  would  have 
been  still  more  frightened,  if  she  had  not  so  soon 
been  assured  that  there  was  no  reason  for  Dame 
Hunt's  alarm." 

Ellen  acknowledged  the  truth  of  her  observa- 
tion, and  again  asked  pardon  for  her  impatience. 

"  I  have  entirely  forgotten  that,"  said  her  good 
aunt,  "  and  I  only  mention  it  that  you  may  learn 
from  this  instance  that  we  are  very  improper 
judges  of  what  we  call  fortunate  or  unfortu- 
nate, in  such  unavoidable  circumstances ;  and 
even  the  future  life  of  the  poor  woman  whom  we 
have  seen  to-day  may  prove  the  truth  of  what  1 
say :  her  misfortunes  may,  in  the  end,  produce 
good  to  her." 

It  was  in  this  manner  Mrs.  Irvin  made  every 
incident  productive  of  instruction  to  her  nieces  ; 
and  they  were  soon  taught  to  consider  even  the 
most  trifling  events  as  under  the  direction  of 
Providence,  and  that  it  is  according  to  our  con- 
duct under  them  whether  they  may  be  styled  good 
or  evil. 

Not  all  the  attention  of  Mrs.  Irvin  could  re- 
store health  to  the  poor  invalid  ;  but  by  frequently 
conversing  with  her,  she  taught  her  to  resign  her- 
self and  children  to  the  will  of  God,  and  from 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  49 

the  assurances  of  Scripture,  to  feel  a  comfortable 
hope  that  those  who  trust  in  the  Almighty  shall 
never  be  forsaken. 

As  it  seemed  to  be  the  wish  of  the  anxious 
mother,  Mrs.  Irvin  promised  that  the  eldest  girl 
should  be  admitted  into  her  school  in  the  village, 
the  next  vacancy ;  and  also  told  her  that  every 
endeavor  should  be  used  to  gain  admission  for 
the  second  into  a  school  in  London  for  blind 
children,  where  she  would  be  instructed  to  do 
something  toward  her  own  support.  Dame  Hunt 
declared  that,  while  she  lived,  they  neither  of  them 
would  want  a  home  ;  "  And  never  you  fear,"  said 
the  good  old  woman,  "  but  what  God  will  raise 
up  friends  for  your  children  a  deal  better  than  I 
am,  should  it  please  him  to  take  me  out  of  this 
world  :   '  He  is  the  father  of  the  fatherless.'  " 

Mrs.  Forbes  felt  as  a  mother  at  the  thoughts 
of  parting  from  her  children ;  but  she  blessed 
God  for  having  brought  her  to  this  place,  and 
giving  her  an  opportunity  of  seeing  the  instru- 
ments by  which  He  would  graciously  provide  for 
them  : — "  Had  I  died  at  Rochester,"  said  she, 
"  what  uncertainty  should  I  have  left  them  in  ! 
And  for  myself,  also,  I  have  reason  to  be  truly 
thankful :  by  these  good  friends  I  am  instructed 
in  the  way  of  everlasting  life  ;  and  I  need  not  now 
fear  to  die,  since  the  door  of  heaven  is  opened 
unto  me  by  a  merciful  Savior." 

Not  many  days  after  this,  the  poor  woman 
died,  having  spent  nearly  six  months  at  Milwood, 
and  experienced  great  kindness  both  from  Mrs. 
Irvin  and  Mr.  Herbert,  who  frequently  visited 
her,  and  from  whom  she  had  the  satisfaction  of 
5 


50  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

hearing  that  her  unfortunate  child  would  be  ad- 
mitted into  the  school  above  mentioned,  and  that 
Mrs.  Irvin  had  determined  to  send  her  up  to  town 
with  Martin,  with  whom  she  was  now  well  ac- 
quainted, having  spent  a  great  deal  of  time  with 
her  during  her  mother's  illness. 

This  poor  little  girl  would  often  say,  "  I  wish 
I  could  help  my  dear  mother  :  I  wish  I  could  see 
her  ;  but  I  shall  in  heaven  :  there  we  shall  never 
be  parted,  and  I  shall  open  my  eyes,  and  see 
much  better  things  than  are  to  be  seen  in  this 
world !" 

On  hearing  of  her  mother's  death,  she  for  a 
while  seemed  much  affected  ;  but  on  Martin's  en- 
deavoring to  give  her  comfort,  by  reminding  her 
of  the  superior  happiness  she  was  now  enjoying, 
she  exclaimed,  "  Oh,  I  will  pray  to  God  to  make 
me  a  good  girl,  that  I  may  go  to  that  delightful 
place  where  my  dear  mother  is  gone.  If  I  am 
good,  I  may  go  there — may  not  I  ?"  asked  she 
with  earnestness. 

"  Yes,  my  dear,"  returned  Martin  :  "  the  same 
Savior  who  died  for  the  pardon  of  her  sins,  died 
also  for  yours ;  and  for  his  sake  God  will  re- 
ceive you  into  heaven,  as  well  as  all  who  trust  in 
him." 

When  the  time  came  for  her  admittance  into 
the  school  above  mentioned,  Mary  Forbes  was 
between  ten  and  eleven,  and  her  sister  thirteen  : 
they  had  never  been  separated  before,  and  it  was 
now  a  great  grief  to  them ;  but  as  Mrs.  Irvin 
thought  it  right,  they  both  endeavored  to  conceal 
their  regret :  yet,  when  the  day  came,  Mary  had 
need  of  all  her  fortitude  to  bear  the  parting :  what 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  51 

she  had  lately  heard  had  taught  her  the  necessity 
of  resignation  to  support  the  evils  of  this  life,  and 
she  earnestly  prayed  that  in  this  trial  she  might 
possess  it.  "  Do  not  cry,  my  dear  Betsy,"  said 
she  ;  "  I  shall  do  all  in  my  power  to  learn  what- 
ever is  taught  me  as  quick  as  ever  I  can ;  and 
then  I  shall  come  home  and  be  able  to  do  some- 
thing for  you,  and  to  help  Dame  Hunt,  who  has 
been  so  good  to  us  :  you  know  God  is  always 
with  us,  and  I  hope  He  will  assist  my  endeavors." 

Betsy  could  scarcely  speak  for  tears  ;  but  she 
tried  to  imitate  her  sister,  and  in  the  most  earnest 
expressions  she  begged  her  not  to  forget  her,  or 
anything  that  had  been  said  to  her  since  she  came 
to  Milwood  ;  they  parted  several  times,  and  still 
returned  to  kiss  each  other  again,  till  poor  Ellen 
and  Anna  could  not  help  expressing  a  wish  that 
their  aunt  would  let  them  both  stay  there  :  "  We 
can  work  for  Mary,"  said  they ;  "  and  Martin 
can  teach  her  a  great  many  things."  But  Mrs. 
Irvin  soon  convinced  them  of  the  impropriety  of 
their  request :  "  You  know,"  said  she,  "  that  it  is 
but  for  a  short  time  she  is  going  ;  and  would  you 
wish  to  deprive  her  of  the  only  opportunity  she 
has  of  ever  learning  to  support  herself?  Think 
how  much  worse  it  would  be  were  we  to  die  be- 
fore her,  and  she  to  be  left  destitute  ;  she  would 
have  reason  to  blame  us  for  this  false  feeling." 

This  reasoning  seemed  equally  to  affect  all 
who  heard  it ;  and  Mary,  loosening  her  hand  from 
her  sister's,  as  she  gave  it  a  last  affectionate  kiss, 
turning  to  Martin,  said  with  great  firmness,  "  I 
am  ready  to  go,  and  I  ought  to  be  happy  to  go  ;  the 
coach  will  wait  for  us :"  for  they  were  to  walk  9. 


52  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

few  miles  to  meet  the  London  stage,  in  which 
places  had  been  taken  for  them  from  the  neigh- 
boring town.  "  Good-by,  my  dear  sister  ;  God 
bless  you  all — all !"  said  she,  as  she  hurried  along 
the  passage  ;  and  when  out  of  the  house,  she  re- 
peated her  prayer,  that  God  would  bless  all  whom 
she  had  left  in  it ;  "  And  I  thank  Him,"  said  she, 
emphatically,  "  for  all  their  kindness  to  me  and 
mine !" 

Martin  was  to  stay  in  town  that  week,  or  per- 
haps longer,  with  some  friends  whom  she  wished 
to  see  there  ;  so  that  before  her  return  Mary 
would  be  settled  and  acquainted  with  the  school, 
and  she  hoped  to  be  able  to  send  such  an  account 
of  her  situation  as  would  make  her  sister  com- 
fortable. She  was  also  to  be  introduced  to  some 
acquaintance  of  Mrs.  Irvin's,  who  promised  her 
often  to  go  and  see  her  there.  On  being  fre- 
quently reminded  of  this,  Betsy  grew  more  recon- 
ciled to  their  separation :  and  when  Martin  re- 
turned, and  related  the  kindness  with  which  she 
had  been  received  by  Mrs.  Irvin's  friends,  she  re- 
joiced that  her  wishes  respecting  her  sister  had 
not  been  complied  with  ;  she  went  constantly  to 
school,  and  though  older  than  many  of  the  chil- 
dren, was  not  ashamed  to  begin  with  the  least ; 
and,  by  a  strict  attention,  she  soon  made  great 
improvement.  Dame  Hunt  was  very  fond  of  her, 
and  as  she  grew  more  infirm,  declared  that  "she 
should  not  know  what  to  do  without  her;"  while, 
by  every  way  in  her  power,  Betsy  endeavored  to 
show  her  gratitude  to  this  her  first  friend,  who 
had  behaved  with  such  kindness  to  herself  and 
sister  when  they  were  poor  and  helpless  strangers. 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  53 

Nothing  more  material  happened  to  our  young 
heroines  during  the  first  foui  or  five  years  of  their 
stay  with  Mrs.  Irvin ;  they  passed  their  time  in 
a  uniform  course  of  improvement ;  and  when  their 
kind  instructress  had  herself  thoroughly  grounded 
them  in  the  various  branches  of  their  education, 
she  spared  no  expense  to  procure  them  the  best 
masters  the  country  afforded :  nor  were  they 
taught  the  accomplishments  their  rank  in  life 
seemed  to  require  with  the  idea  that  they  were 
tO  make  a  figure  in  the  world,  but  that,  in  what- 
ever circumstances  they  might  in  future  be  placed, 
they  should  be  capable  of  adding  either  to  the 
improvement  or  amusement  of  others.  With  all 
this,  the  strictest  attention  was  paid  to  their  reli- 
gious improvement,  the  superior  importance  of 
which  they  were  taught,  both  by  the  precept  and 
example  of  their  aunt.  Nothing  was  allowed  to 
interfere  with  their  duty  to  God  ;  on  the  contrary, 
their  various  employments  were  often  interrupted 
by  works  of  piety  and  charity.  "  These,"  said 
Mrs.  Irvin,  "  will  fit  you  for  more  lasting  enjoy- 
ment !  they  are  necessary  to  a  happy  eternity, 
and  are  certainly  more  worthy  our  attention  than 
those  fleeting  accomplishments  which  can  be  of 
service  to  you  only  in  this  life,  and  probably  but 
for  a  small  portion  of  it ;  for  a  thousand  things 
may  prevent  your  improvement  of  them ;  while 
good  works  will  remain  hereafter,  and  your  re- 
ward will  be,  though  not  for  them,  yet  in  propor- 
tion to  them." 

Mrs.  Stanley  wrote  once  or  twice  to  her  sister 
during  this  period,  expressing  herself  much 
obliged  by  her  attention  to  her  children,  and 
5* 


54  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

pleased  with  the  account  she  heard  of  their  im- 
provement, but  with  great  coolness  toward  them- 
selves. She  gave  a  long  account  of  the  splendor 
of  the  East ;  the  balls  and  entertainments  she  was 
continually  engaged  in  :  but  as  to  the  time  of  their 
return,  she  said  she  could  not  get  Mr.  Stanley  to 
fix  any ;  but  whenever  they  revisited  England, 
she  hoped  it  would  be  in  a  style  far  superior  to 
any  of  their  former  acquaintance. 

After  two  years'  absence  from  her  friends, 
Mary  Forbes  returned  to  them,  much  benefited 
by  the  charitable  instructions  she  had  received  ; 
she  was  now  enabled  to  do  many  things  which 
before  she  was  incapable  of,  and,  when  fully  em- 
ployed, could  earn  several  shillings  a  week.  How 
often  did  she  thank  Mrs.  Irvin  for  putting  her  in 
the  way  of  learning  to  provide  for  herself,  and 
bless  the  Institution  which  was  thus  alleviating 
the  misfortune  of  other  poor  children  !  Betsy 
was  delighted  to  see  her ;  and  after  her  return 
went  no  more  to  school,  but  devoted  her  whole 
time  to  the  care  of  her  sister,  and  of  Dame  Hunt, 
who  was  now  very  much  enfeebled.  Ellen  and 
Anna  used  frequently  to  visit  them,  and  while 
Betsy  was  otherwise  engaged,  would  read  to  the 
old  woman  and  Mary  such  books  as  reconciled 
them  to  their  lots  in  this  life,  and  encouraged  them, 
through  the  merits  of  a  Redeemer,  to  look  for  a 
glorious  inheritance  hereafter.  Nor  were  their 
attentions  confined  to  this  family  alone  ;  every 
poor  person  in  the  parish  had  reason  to  bless  God 
for  them,  and  was  daily  offering  up  prayers  to 
Him  for  their  happiness  and  long  continuance 
anions  them. 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  55 


CHAPTER  V. 


"  The  spring-time  of  our  years 
Is  soon  dishonor'd,  and  defiled  in  most 
By  budding  ills  that  ask  a  prudent  hand 
To  check  them."  Cowper. 

Mrs.  Irvin  observed  that  though,  from  being 
constantly  in  her  society,  the  impatience  and  ir- 
ritability of  Ellen's  temper  were  much  suppressed, 
they  were  far  from  being  subdued  ;  and  now  that  she 
had  for  so  long  a  time  given  her  nieces  an  oppor- 
tunity of  observing  the  advantages  resulting  from 
the  plan  of  education  she  had  pursued,  she  was 
desirous  they  should  also  see  the  difference  of 
the  more  general  mode  ;  and  that,  from  their  own 
experience,  they  should  form  their  judgment  of 
each. 

For  this  reason  she  proposed  sending  an  invi- 
tation to  the  daughters  of  some  former  friends  of 
their  parents,  a  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Arnold  ;  with  whom 
Mrs.  Stanley  had  been  staying  at  the  time  of  her 
marriage.  Mrs.  Arnold  had  also,  in  her  younger 
days,  been  intimate  with  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  and  though 
it  was  seldom  they  had  met  since  that  time,  an 
appearance  of  friendship  was  still  kept  up  between 
them. 

Though  Mrs.  Arnold  was  gay  and  dissipated, 
she  thought  it  necessary  to  give  her  children  what 
is  called  a  good  education ;  and  the  two  eldest, 
at  the  time  Ellen  and  Anna  came  to  their  aunt's, 


56  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

had  been  to  a  very  capital  school  nearly  a  twelve- 
month. It  was  these  young  ladies  Mrs.  Irvin 
wished  to  introduce  to  her  nieces,  particularly  as 
the  parents  of  each  were  connected,  Mr.  Stanley 
being  a  distant  relation  of  Mrs.  Arnold  ;  and  the 
letters  which  Mrs.  Irvin  now  and  then  received 
from  her  abounded  with  solicitous  inquiries  re- 
specting the  children  of  her  friend. 

Ellen  and  Anna  were  too  happy  in  the  society 
of  each  other,  and  found  too  many  ways  of  occu- 
pying their  time,  to  wish  much  for  the  company 
of  others  :  yet  the  thought  of  becoming  acquaint- 
ed with  some  young  people  in  the  same  rank  of 
life  as  themselves  pleased  them  in  idea,  and  they 
were  anxious  to  hear  if  the  invitation  their  aunt 
had  sent  would  be  accepted  ;  but  no  sooner  did 
the  letter  arrive,  which  brought  the  thanks  of  Mrs. 
Arnold,  and  her  promise,  that,  as  the  midsummer 
holydays  were  approaching,  her  daughters  should, 
immediately  on  their  commencement,  visit  Mrs. 
Irvin,  than  they  felt  more  uneasiness  than  pleasure 
in  the  expectation  of  their  arrival. — "  What  shall 
we  do  ?"  said  Anna ;  "  how  are  we  to  entertain 
them  ?  they  are  both  older  than  we  are  ;  and  my 
aunt  says  they  have  been  to  school  for  so  many 
years,  that  I  dare  say  they  know  a  great  deal 
more  than  we  do." 

"  I  don't  know  that,"  said  Ellen  ;  "  for  I  have 
heard  Mr.  Herbert  say,  that  it  is  not  at  schools 
young  folks  learn  the  most :  for  my  part,  I  am 
determined  not  to  be  afraid  of  them  :  I  shall  say, 
that  I  know  both  music  and  drawing  very  well." 

"  Stop,  my  dear,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  interrupting 
her :   "let  not  a  wish  to  exalt  yourself  in  their 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  57 

opinion  put  you  upon  telling  untruths  ;  it  is  not 
likely  that  you  should  either  play  or  draw  so  well 
as  these  young  ladies,  who  have  had  the  best 
masters  for  so  long  a  time  ;  assure  yourself  that 
they  will  soon  discover  what  you  can  as  well 
as  what  you  cannot  do  :  children  more  ignorant 
than  yourselves  have  hitherto  been  your  com- 
panions ;  and  there  is  nothing  unpleasant  in  the 
idea,  since  you  have  endeavored,  as  far  as  you 
are  capable,  to  improve  them  ;  but  now  you  are 
to  be  introduced  into  very  different  society,  yet 
remember,  that  '  high  and  low,  rich  and  poor,  are 
all  alike  in  the  sight  of  God ;'  and  let  not  their 
opinion,  which  in  this  respect  may  be  very  oppo- 
site to  yours,  make  you  act  otherwise  than  you 
have  done.  Though  your  manners  may  not  be  so 
fashionable  as  theirs,  be  uniformly  good-natured, 
and  let  us  show  them  the  politeness  of  a  Chris- 
tian, rather  than  that  of  the  gay  world." 

In  less  than  a  fortnight,  the  young  visiters  ar- 
rived, in  their  father's  chariot,  attended  by  a  foot- 
man on  horseback.  Ellen  and  Anna,  when  they 
saw  the  carriage  approach,  looked  at  each  other 
with  apprehension ;  they  knew  not  whether  to 
run  to  the  door  to  welcome  their  guests,  or  fly  up 
stairs  to  hide  themselves. 

"  When  Mary  Forbes  came  home,"  said  Anna, 
"  we  were  not  at  a  loss  how  to  receive  her ;  we 
were  glad  to  see  her." 

"  So  you  will  be  to  see  these  young  ladies, 
I  hope,"  said  their  aunt :  "  come  with  me,  and 
meet  them  in  the  hall." 

"  Yes,  we  will,"  said  Ellen,  resuming  her  boast- 


58  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

ed  courage  ;  "  what  have  we  to  be  afraid  of? — 
the  manners  of  the  outside  are  of  very  little  con- 
sequence." 

As  she  spoke  this  the  Miss  Arnolds  entered 
the  house.  They  were  genteel-looking  girls,  and 
without  that  forwardness  of  manners  too  often 
seen  in  those  young  ones  of  the  present  age,  who, 
by  being  introduced  so  early  into  the  world,  lose 
the  simplicity  and  engaging  diffidence  of  youth, 
which  once  was  looked  upon  as  the  presage  of 
advancing  Avorth. 

Mrs.  Irvin  received  them  with  affection,  as  she 
considered  they  were  the  children  of  her  earliest 
friend  ;  and  she  introduced  them  to  her  nieces, 
by  whom  they  were  conducted  to  the  parlor, 
where  she  again  expressed  herself  happy  to  see 
them  :  and  Ellen  and  Anna,  by  every  attention  in 
their  power,  endeavored  to  lessen  the  awkward- 
ness which  they  could  not  help  suspecting  even 
ladies  so  used  to  the  world  must  feel,  on  being 
introduced  to  entire  strangers. 

The  usual  civilities  passed  between  them  ;  and 
it  was  not  long  before  all  parties  seemed  acquaint- 
ed with  each  other.  The  evening  was  far  ad- 
vanced, and  the  Miss  Arnolds  having  been  so 
long  a  journey  that  day,  made  it  an  excuse  for  re- 
tiring early  to  rest. 

The  sisters  rose  the  next  morning  at  their  usual 
time  ;  but  though  they  allowed  a  later  hour  to 
their  visiters,  they  were  surprised  to  find  they  far 
exceeded  it.  Mrs.  Irvin  thought  it  necessary  to 
wait  breakfast  for  them  ;  and  Ellen  and  Anna  had 
read  and  repeated  most  of  their  lessons,  before 
the  Miss  Arnolds  appeared. 


THfi  TWIN  SISTERS.  59 

After  breakfast  their  aunt  thought  it  best  to 
leave  them  entirely  alone  ;  and  with  a  look  of  en- 
couragement to  her  nieces,  who  fearfully  saw  her 
depart,  she  left  the  room.  Ellen  then  asked  Miss 
Arnold,  if  she  would  favor  them  by  sitting  down 
to  the  piano  ? — This  request  was  readily  complied 
with ;  and  the  eldest  Miss  Arnold  played  a  very 
difficult  piece  with  great  execution.  Her  sister 
next  took  her  seat ;  and  afterward  Ellen  and 
Anna :  the  former  had  very  early  shown  a  taste 
for  music  ;  and  her  visiter  was  surprised,  if  not  a 
little  mortified,  to  find  her  performance  far  sur- 
passed the  idea  she  had  formed  of  what  could  be 
learned  from  a  country  master. 

Charlotte  (which  was  the  name  of  the  second 
Miss  Arnold)  paid  little  attention  to  Ellen's  play- 
ing, but  seemed  more  anxious  to  enter  into  con- 
versation with  Anna,  in  whom  she  thought  she 
had  discovered  a  strong  likeness  to  one  of  her 
school-fellows  : — "  How  old  are  you  ?"  inquired 
she  ;  "  for  I  declare  you  are  just  like  Miss  B**, 
and  exactly  her  size  also  ;  are  you  younger  than 
your  sister  ?"  continued  she. 

"  We  are  between  fourteen  and  fifteen,"  an- 
swered Anna :  "  do  not  you  know  that  my  sister 
and  myself  are  of  the  same  age  ?" 

"  You  are  twins,  then  ?"  replied  Charlotte  ;  "  I 
had  forgotten  it ;  how  pleasant  that  must  be,  for 
you  must  know  I  hate  an  elder  sister  vastly !  in 
general  they  are  so  commanding ;  but  I  suppose 
you  love  each  other  better  than  other  sisters  ?" 

Anna  smiled. — "  I  don't  know,"  said  she  ;  "  we 
shall  see,  perhaps,  while  you  are  here  ;  at  pres- 


60  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

ent,  we  have  not  known  any  sisters  who  do  not 
love  each  other." 

"  Ah,  you  allude  to  what  I  have  said,"  replied 
her  companion  ;  "  but,  to  tell  you  the  truth,  you 
may  expect  to  see  my  sister  and  me  quarrel  ten 
times  a  day ; — at  least,  if  you  were  at  school 
with  us  I  am  sure  you  would  ;  for  there,  being  the 
eldest,  she  has  some  little  authority  over  me,  and 
I  assure  you  she  exercises  it  very  severely." 

Anna  knew  not  what  answer  to  make,  and  en- 
deavored to  change  the  conversation  by  asking 
the  age  of  her  new  acquaintance. 

"  I  am  almost  fifteen,"  returned  Charlotte  ; 
"  and  my  sister  is  more  than  sixteen :  I  hope,  there- 
fore, she  will  soon  leave  school :  then,  Augusta, 
one  younger  than  myself,  will  come  ;  and  it  will  be 
my  turn  to  have  power  over  her,  and  I  shall  make 
her  know  what  I  have  felt  under  Harriet." 

Anna  was  quite  startled.  "  Surely,"  said  she, 
"  that  will  be  very  cruel !  I  should  think,  if  I 
had  experienced  want  of  kindness  in  my  sister, 
I  should  be  more  anxious  to  show  it  to  another." 

"  Oh,  no,  you  would  not,"  replied  the  unfeeling 
girl :  "  if  you  were  at  school,  you  would  soon 
learn  a  different  opinion  :  it  is  very  pretty  to  talk 
as  you  do,  and  we  often  meet  with  such  fine  sen- 
timents in  our  lessons  ;  but  no  one  thinks  of  put- 
ting them  in  practice." 

During  this  conversation,  the  other  ladies  had 
gone  up  stairs  ;  and  Charlotte  proposed  following 
them.     Anna  attended  her  in  silence. 

"  Is  this  what  is  learned  at  boarding-schools  V 
thought  she  ;  "  then  we  have  nothing  to  regret ; — 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  61 

if  we  had  been  there,  perhaps  I  should  have  hated 
my  sister." 

Ellen  and  Anna  smiled  on  each  other  as  they 
observed  the  various  ornaments  their  visiters  had 
brought ;  while  they  evidently  enjoyed  the  sur- 
prise expressed  by  them,  on  seeing  so  many 
things  which  to  them  appeared  useless  and  un- 
necessary. 

"  Look  at  this  muslin  frock,"  said  Miss  Arnold  : 
"it  is  what  I  wore  at  our  last  public  day,  and 
quite  a  fashionable  make  ;  for  the  mantua-maker 
assured  me  she  had  made  but  one  before,  and  that 
was  for  Lady  Charlotte  A***.  I  wore  this  wreath 
of  roses  round  my  head  ; — don't  you  think  them 
pretty  ?" 

"  Very  pretty,"  answered  Ellen  ;  "  but  I  am 
sorry  you  brought  them  here,  as  I  fear  you  will 
not  have  an  opportunity  of  wearing  them  ;  and 
their  being  so  closely  packed  seems  to  have  in- 
jured them  already." 

"  Oh,  that  is  of  no  consequence,"  replied  the 
other  ;  "  1  should  not  take  them  to  school  the  next 
half  year ;  the  ladies  would  think  it  very  odd 
to  see  the  same  things  come  back  again :  I 
knew  this  was  a  very  retired  situation,  and  there- 
fore brought  them,  as  I  thought  they  would  be 
new  here." 

"  Quite  new,  indeed  !"  answered  Ellen,  with  a 
smile  ;  "  such  a  dress  as  this  would  excite  the 
astonishment  of  all  the  people  in  the  village  ;  I 
really  wish  you  had  not  brought  things  half  so 
smart." 

"  My  dear  child,"  said  Harriet,  "  would  you 
not  have  us  dress  according  to  our  rank  in  life  ? 
6 


62  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

Our  situation  demands  it  of  us  ;  and  to  regard 
our  appearance  is  what  our  governess  always  in- 
culcates." 

"  You  must  excuse  my  ignorance,"  said  Ellen, 
with  unconcern  ;  "  I  did  not  know  that  dress  was 
so  absolutely  necessary  to  denote  our  rank  or 
situation  in  life  ;  but  I  am  sure  it  is  not  so  here ; 
for  every  one  respects  my  good  aunt,  though  I 
never  saw  her  but  in  the  plainest  dress." 

"  Your  aunt,"  returned  Harriet,  "  is  out  of  the 
world  ;  but  we  are  just  entered  into  it.  I  hope  she 
does  not  mean  to  regulate  your  apparel  by  her  own. 
When  you  come  to  London,  (as,  when  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Stanley  return  from  abroad,  I  suppose  you 
will,)  I  assure  you,  you  will  find  many  things  ne- 
cessary in  regard  to  dress,  of  which  at  present 
you  have  no  idea ;  and  your  good  aunt,  in  her 
plain  suit,  would  have  little  regard  paid  to  her  in 
the  large  circle  of  the  fashionable  world." 

"  It  must  be  a  very  strange  world,"  answered 
Ellen,  rather  indignantly,  while  the  color  rose  in 
her  cheeks  at  hearing  her  aunt  so  spoken  of,  "  that 
would  not  regard  and  respect  her  also  ;  and  I 
should  not  wish  to  belong  to  it." 

Mrs.  Irvin  now  very  opportunely  entered  the 
room,  and  put  an  end  to  their  conversation. 

When  the  business  of  unpacking  was  over,  they 
returned  to  the  parlor  ;  and  thinking  it  too  warm 
to  walk,  Mrs.  Irvin  begged  to  hear  Miss  Arnold 
sing  the  last  new  song  :  and  thus,  with  the  help 
of  the  piano,  the  time  passed  away  till  dinner  was 
announced. 

In  the  evening,  their  amiable  hostess  proposed 
a  walk  to  the  village,  the  rural  and  retired  situa- 


THE 'TWIN  SISTERS.  63 

tion  of  which  seemed  highly  pleasing  to  her  vis- 
iters. It  was  a  lovely  evening,  and  no  view  could 
be  more  beautiful  than  that  which  presented  itself 
on  their  leaving  Mrs.  Irvin's  garden :  the  trees 
were  in  full  leaf,  and,  tinged  with  the  setting  sun, 
they  immediately  attracted  the  notice  of  the 
strangers. 

"  We  cannot  see  such  trees  as  these  in  the 
Squares  of  London,"  said  Harriet :  "  I  must  ac- 
knowledge, that  a  walk  in  the  country  like  this, 
is  far  preferable  to  the  slow  and  uniform  pace 
with  which  we  are  obliged  to  follow  our  gover- 
ness, one  behind  another,  round  the  garden  of  the 
Square,  or  up  and  down  the  measured  path  of  the 
Park." 

In  the  course  of  their  walk,  they  called  on  one 
or  two  of  the  poor  people  who  were  unwell ;  and, 
on  their  return,  they  again  had  recourse  to  the 
music,  which  very  agreeably  passed  away  the 
evening. 

"  There  are  very  few  ladies  among  us,"  said 
Miss  Arnold  to  Ellen.  "  who  play  as  you  do  ;  you 
certainly  have  quite  a  genius  for  music  :  you  can 
sing  also,  I  dare  say  ?  and  I  should  like  to  hear 
you." 

Ellen  was  going  to  answer,  when  her  aunt  pre- 
vented her,  by  saying,  "  You  will  soon  have  an  op- 
portunity, my  dear,  of  hearing  us  all  sing  :  for  we 
have  an  old-fashioned  custom  in  this  house  of 
family  prayer  ;  and  we  generally  sing  a  hymn  be- 
fore we  pray." 

Harriet  smiled.  "  I  thought  that  it  was  only 
at  schools  that  prayers  were  read  to  us  ;  our 
governess  does  that  every  morning  and  evening : 


64  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

— I  shall  think  myself  with  her  again : — but  we 
never  sing  hymns,"  continued  she  ;  "  it  is  so 
Methodistical." 

Mrs.  Irvin  now  smiled  in  her  turn,  and  answer- 
ed, "  That  was  an  appellation  she  was  not  afraid 
of;  and,"  said  she,  "this  is  a  method  productive 
of  so  much  pleasure  that  I  should  be  sorry  to 
give  it  up :  in  former  times,  it  was  thought  a 
great  help  to  devotion  ;  and  I  believe  it  is  still  re- 
tained in  many  families  from  that  motive." 

Such  reasoning  was  quite  unintelligible  to  Miss 
Arnold ;  but  she  was  prevented  answering  by 
the  entrance  of  the  servants  ;  and  while  Ellen 
played  the  Evening  Hymn,  accompanying  it  with 
her  voice,  the  whole  family  joined  in  the  solemn 
strain  :  nor  could  these  young  ladies  help  a  silent 
acknowledgment,  that  they  had  never  before  felt 
so  devoutly  inclined,  as  when,  at  the  conclusion, 
each  knelt  down,  and  Mrs.  Irvin  read  a  prayer 
with  great  solemnity ;  that,  for  the  time,  they 
wished  they  could  experience  the  same  when 
joining  in  the  prayers  at  school ;  but  there  it  was 
performed  in  so  indolent  a  manner,  and  so  much 
of  form  appeared  to  be  introduced  in  the  midst  of 
very  contrary  pursuits,  that  little  else  but  their 
length  was  thought  of  during  the  time  of  reading 
them. 

The  serious  surprise  which  appeared  in  their 
countenances  attracted  the  notice  of  Mrs.  Irvin, 
who,  after  the  servants  had  left  the  room,  inquir- 
ed at  what  time  their  governess  read  prayers  ? 
"  Oh,  just  before  bed-time,  ma'am,"  answered 
Charlotte,  "  after  we  have  supped,  and  are  all  got 
to  play  or  quarrelling  together,  (for  I  think  we  do 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  65 

one  as  much  as  the  other,)  she  enters  the  room, 
and  breaks  up  all  our  parties  by  calling  us  to 
prayers,  which  I  can't  say  we  much  attend  to. 
We  go  to  bed,  unless  sometimes,  when  the  rules 
are  not  so  strictly  attended  to,  we  are  allowed  to 
finish  our  game  of  play  before  the  bed-bell  is 
rung." 

Mrs.  Irvin  commended  her  for  thinking  such  a 
way  of  performing  our  devotions  was  not  quite 
right ;  and  after  supper  they  chatted  together  for 
about  an  hour,  during  which  time  our  heroines 
found  still  more  reason  to  rejoice  at  not  having 
been  to  school.  They  were  astonished  at  the 
tricks  and  sly  ways,  as  their  visiters  termed  many 
of  the  anecdotes  they  told  them,  which  to  Ellen 
and  Anna  appeared  little  less  than  cheating  and  de- 
ceiving each  other  ;  while  the  Miss  iVrnolds  were 
much  entertained  at  the  surprise  they  expressed, 
and  considered  it  as  a  degree  of  ignorance  exci- 
ting mirth  rather  than  congratulation. 

The  next  morning  the  Miss  Arnolds  were 
busily  employed  in  work  ;  each  was  netting  a 
purse  for  her  parents,  which  she  meant  to  carry 
them  on  her  return  :  these  our  heroines  were  so 
pleased  with,  that  they  immediately  determined 
to  do  the  same  for  their  father  and  mother — "  We 
are  to  write  to  them  by  the  next  ship,"  said  Anna, 
"  and  my  aunt  says  I  shall  send  the  drawing  I 
am  now  about,  if  I  finish  it  as  well  as  I  have  be- 
gun ;  but  I  think  I  can  do  the  purse  likewise,  if 
you  will  give  me  some  instruction." 

This  was  readily  promised,  and  Mrs.  Irvin 
willingly  agreed  to  the  proposal,  provided  it  did 
not  prevent  her  attention  to  the  drawing  ;  which 
6* 


66  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

she  particularly  wished  to  send  them,  as  it  was 
from  nature,  and  represented  a  part  of  the  village 
of  Milwood,  which  was  very  picturesque.  They 
were  now  eager  to  lose  no  time  before  they  began 
their  purses  ;  and  their  aunt  allowed  the  servant 
to  go  that  afternoon  to  the  neighboring  town  to 
procure  the  materials  :  so  ready  was  she  always 
to  grant  them  what  was  not  improper. 

The  next  day  the  work  was  begun,  and  the 
whole  morning  was  engaged  in  perfecting  them- 
selves in  it ;  till  Mrs.  Irvin  began  to  fear  they 
would  not  allow  time  enough  to  their  visiters' 
amusement,  who  already,  by  their  listlessness, 
began  to  show  they  should  not  be  sorry  when  the 
time  they  were  to  stay  was  expired.  They  thought 
the  situation  of  Milwood  uncommonly  dull ;  nor 
is  it  to  be  wondered  at,  when  the  very  different 
education  they  had  received,  from  that  which  its 
inhabitants  were  blessed  with,  is  considered ; 
they  could  not  conceive  the  pleasure  of  calling  at 
so  many  houses  of  the  poor,  because  the  idea  of 
doing  them  any  good,  or  relieving  their  wants, 
never  entered  their  heads  ;  and  when  they  heard 
Ellen  say,  that  according  to  their  aunt's  instruc- 
tions, she  considered  the  good  things  she  enjoyed 
as  only  given  her  for  this  purpose,  they  were  as- 
tonished at  her  reasoning.  "  Besides,"  continued 
Ellen,  "  we  enjoy  our  own  share  so  much  more, 
when  we  can  reflect  that  we  have  relieved  others 
with  part  of  it." 

"  Your  aunt  tells  you  so,  I  suppose  ?"  said 
Harriet,  with  a  sneer. 

"  Yes,"  said  Ellen,  endeavoring  to  repress  her 
anger  ;  "  and  from  very  good  authority  too." 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  67 

"  Our  own  experience  likewise,"  said  Anna, 
taking  up  the  conversation,  "  tells  us  the  same  ;  it 
certainly  must  give  us  pleasure  to  think  that  by 
us  God  chooses  to  assist  the  poor." 

"  But  you  ought  to  have  thousands,"  continued 
Harriet,  "  to  help  all  you  know  ;  and  they  are 
still  distressed  when  you  have  done  all  you  can." 

"  Very  true,"  said  Ellen  ;  "  and  still  will  be  : 
but  they  would  be  more  so  without  any  help  ; 
every  little  we  give  is  acceptable  to  them,  and,  if 
given  with  a  view  of  performing  our  duty  1,0  God, 
is  of  service  likewise  to  ourselves." 

"  You  talk  so  very  religiously,"  said  Harriet, 
"  that  I  don't  know  what  to  make  of  you ;  but  I 
must  say,  I  pity  you." 

"  I  am  sorry,"  said  Ellen,  "  you  should  be  so 
mistaken  in  regard  to  us  :  have  you  ever  seen  my 
sister  or  me  unhappy  ?" 

"  No,  not  absolutely  unhappy  ;  but  you  never 
have  what  our  young  ladies  call  pleasure  ;  I  dare 
say  you  never  went  to  a  ball  or  a  play  in  your 
life  :  we  have  public  days  once  a  month,  and  a 
dancing-school  ball  every  year  ;  and  then  we  have 
so  many  smart  people  come  to  see  us  dance,  and 
we  gain  such  praise,  and  our  master  is  so  much 
obliged  to  us  !  Then  it  is  so  much  pleasure  to 
think  of  our  dresses,  for  two  or  three  months  be- 
fore the  ball :  the  mantua-makers  are  all  so  busy, 
you  can  have  no  idea  ;  and  we  try  to  outdo  each 
other  in  the  money  we  spend — for  mamma  always 
says  we  should  spare  no  expense.  And  then,  at 
other  times,  we  perform  plays  ;  and  we  have 
spectators  at  them  too;  and  we  are  always  sure 
to  be  admired  for  one  thing  or  another." 


G8  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

Ellen  could  not  help  pitying  such  ideas  of  hap- 
piness ;  but  she  only  replied  by  saying,  "  She 
could  not  envy  them  either  their  balls  or  plays. 
As  for  the  latter,"  said  she,  "  I  should  never  think 
of  being  a  performer  ;  and  to  dance  a  minuet  be- 
fore so  many  people  must  be  very  distressing." 

"  I  dare  say  it  would  be  to  you,"  answered 
Harriet,  "  who  have  seen  so  little  of  the  world ; 
but  we  are  so  used  to  it,  that  we  think  it  not  worth 
while  to  dance  when  no  one  sees  us.  But  now 
we  talk  of  dancing,  let  us  have  a  reel  and  a  min- 
uet or  two  this  evening :  I  suppose  you  have 
learned — that  is,  as  well  as  you  can  in  the  coun- 
try." 

This  she  proposed,  as  thinking  it  would  be  an 
amusement  to  observe  their  awkward  steps  ;  but 
Ellen,  who  did  not  consider  it  as  any  disgrace  if 
she  did  not  dance  in  the  style  of  Madame  Hillis- 
berg  or  Parisot,  readily  agreed  to  it,  saying,  "  We 
have  a  master  who  attends  us  once  a  week  ;  but 
it  is  now  the  holydays,  which  is  the  reason  he  has 
not  been  here  since  your  arrival  ;  but  we  shall 
like  a  little  dance  this  evening,  if  agreeable  to 
you.  Anna  and  I  often  play  to  each  other,  while 
we  practise  our  steps  ;  but  you  must  not  expect, 
to  find  us  great  proficients,"  continued  she  ;  "  for 
my  aunt  is  not  so  anxious  for  our  improvement  in 
dancing,  as  in  music  and  drawing,  which,  as  we 
live  so  much  alone,  are  amusements  much  better 
calculated  for  us." 

In  the  evening  it  rained,  so  as  to  prevent  their 
walking  ;  but  this  they  did  not  regret,  as  their 
dance  was  not  interrupted,  which,  though  with  so 
small  a  number  (as  one  of  them  was  always  at  the 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  69 

instrument),  they  kept  up  for  some  time  ;  and 
both  the  Miss  Arnolds,  contrary  to  their  expecta- 
tions, were  surprised  to  find  they  could  enjoy 
dancing  with  only  Mrs.  Irvin  for  their  spectator, 
who  looked  on  with  pleasure  ;  while  Ellen  and 
Anna  were  equally  gratified,  whether  dancing  to 
their  guests  or  playing  to  them. 

The  young  visiters,  after  having  spent  one  week 
at  Milwood,  began  to  be  tired  of  the  uniformity  of 
the  scene  ;  and,  though  Mrs.  Irvin  and  her  nieces 
had  given  up  the  greatest  part  of  their  time  to 
their  amusement,  they  could  not  but  find  it  dull ; 
and  Charlotte,  who  had  at  first  shown  an  inclina- 
tion for  the  friendship  of  Anna,  by  making  her  the 
confidant  of  her  sister's  humor,  by  many  hints  of 
the  unpleasantness  of  her  situation,  endeavored  to 
draw  from  her  an  acknowledgment  that  she  was 
also  tired  of  it.  And  one  morning,  when  they 
were  quite  alone,  she  thought  proper  to  make  the 
trial,  which  she  began  in  the  following  words  : — 

"  I  cannot  think  what  you  will  do,  my  dear  An- 
na, when  we  are  gone  :  I  shall  often  think  of  you 
with  pity,  buried  here,  as  you  are." 

Anna.  "  I  thank  you  for  your  compassion;  but 
pray  don't  make  yourself  very  unhappy  on  my  ac- 
count :  I  assure  you,  Ellen  and  1  never  want 
amusement  when  we  are  alone." 

Charlotte.  "  Why,  what  can  you  find  to  do  ? 
Day  after  day  to  go  on  in  the  same  dull  round — 
it  would  be  very  tiresome  to  me." 

Anna.  "  But  don't  you  go  on  the  same  round  at 
school  ?     Day  after  day,  I  suppose  you  learn  your 


70  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

lessons,  and  repeat  them,  practise  your  music  and 
dancing  : — is  not  this  always  the  same  ?" 

Charlotte.  "  Very  true  ;  but  then  we  have 
variety,  and  so  many  young  ones  all  employed 
in  the  same  way  :  besides,  we  have  the  holy- 
days  to  look  forward  to,  while  you  have  none." 

Anna.  "  Every  day  is  a  holyday  to  us  ;  at  least 
every  Sunday  is  ;  for  then  we  have  no  lessons  to 
learn,  no  masters  attend  us,  and  we  have  time  to 
do  as  we  like." 

Charlotte.  "  Not  as  you  like  ;  for  I  dare  say 
your  aunt  makes  you  read  sermons  to  her  all  day 
long." 

Anna.  "  We  read  such  books  as  we  like,  and 
that  are  instructive  as  well  as  entertaining.  Pray, 
what  do  you  read  on  Sundays  ?" 

Charlotte.  "  Oh,  for  my  part,  I  never  read  any  ! 
Those  books  that  my  governess  says  are  fit  for 
Sunday  reading  are,  in  my  opinion,  so  very  dull, 
that  I  seldom  look  into  them." 

Anna.  "  What !  do  you  never  read  the  Bible  ? 
you  don't  know  that  there  are  prettier  stories  to 
be  found  in  it  than  in  most  other  books." 

Charlotte.  "  Sometimes  we  are  told  to  read 
Mrs.  Trimmer's  History  of  it ;  but  I  think  if  we 
go  to  church  and  hear  it  read  there,  that  is  quite 
enough  :  besides,  it  is  so  common  to  read  the  Bi- 
ble, I  think  it  is  only  fit  for  poor  people." 

Anna.  "  This  is  a  very  odd  notion  ;  I  should 
think,  and  indeed  I  am  sure  of  it,  that  the  instruc- 
tions contained  in  the  Bible  are  equally  intended 
for  the  rich  as  for  the  poor  :  I  cannot  say  but  that 
I  pity  you  now,  for  you  do  not  seem  to  know  your 
duty,  nor  where  you  are  to  learn  it," 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  71 

Charlotte.  "  Well,  dear  me  !  don't  speak  so 
angrily ;  you  forget  that  we  very  often  go  out  on 
a  Sunday  ;  and  then,  you  know,  there  can  be  no 
time  for  reading." 

Anna.  "  Ah  !  that  is  one  of  the  rules  that  my 
aunt  dislikes  in  schools  : — that  Sunday,  which  is 
generally  thought  the  only  time  that  can  be  spar- 
ed from  accomplishments,  is  so  often  spent  in 
visiting  !  Indeed,  you  must  excuse  me,  my  dear 
Charlotte,  if  I  again  say  I  pity  you." 

Charlotte.  "  Well,  tell  me,  then,  where  these 
pretty  stories  are  to  be  met  with  in  the  Bible  ; 
and  when  I.  have  time  I'll  read  them,  if  I  spend  a 
Sunday  at  school." 

Anna.  "  I'll  write  them  down  for  you,  and  then 
you  cannot  forget  them  :"  and  taking  out  a  pocket- 
book,  she  copied  from  a  list  that  had  formerly 
been  given  herself  the  following  memoranda  : — 
"  From  the  37th  and  39th  chapters  of  Genesis  to 
the  45th,  or  to  the  end  of  that  book,  the  history 
of  Joseph  is  continued.  The  17th  and  18th  chap- 
ters of  the  first  book  of  Kings. — The  latter," 
said  she,  "  will  show  you  how  the  Almighty 
showed  himself  the  true  God,  when  the  people  of 
Israel  had  gone  and  served  Baal. — And  from  the 
4th  to  the  8th  chapter  of  the  second  book  of 
Kings,  you  will  find  many  interesting  acts  of  the 
prophet  Elisha :  and  indeed,  all  through  those 
books  are  very  entertaining,  and  I  think  the  more 
you  read  them,  the  more  you  will  like  them.  The 
book  of  Esther  is  pretty  also." 

Charlotte.  (Interrupting  her.)  "  These  •  are 
quite  enough,  I  thank  you.     I  am  sure  I  shall  not 


72  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

have  time  to  read  more  than  these  ;  and  when  I 
want  something  to  do,  I  will  look  them  over." 

Anna.  (Very  seriously.)  "  I  hardly  know 
whether  I  have  done  right  in  giving  you  this 
list ;  you  speak  in  such  a  careless  way  of  read- 
ing in  that  book  which  I  have  been  taught  to  look 
into  with  reverence,  and  to  consider  it  an  indul- 
gence to  be  allowed  to  read  in  it.  When  we  con- 
sider for  what  end  it  was  written,  surely  it  re- 
quires the  utmost  attention  ; — especially  the  New 
Testament ;  for  there  we  are  to  learn  what  will 
make  us  acceptable  in  the  sight  of  God." 

Charlotte.  "  Dear  me  !  you  think  so  seriously 
of  everything  !  But  while  we  are  under  the  care 
of  others,  you  know  it  is  of  very  little  conse- 
quence to  us  ;  they  are  accountable  for  our  ac- 
tions, and  we  are  not  our  own  mistresses." 

Anna.  "  Why  do  you  say  it  is  of  little  conse- 
quence to  us  ?  Don't  you  know  that,  at  the  last 
day,  we  shall  have  to  give  an  account  of  our  ac- 
tions, individually ;  and  that  even  our  secret 
thoughts  are  regarded  by  God,  and  will  be  brought 
irito  judgment?" 

Charlotte.  "  I  would  not  have  such  notions  as 
these  for  ever  so  much !  I  am  sure  they  would 
make  me  miserable  !  I  think  the  best  way  is  to 
try  to  please  everybody  as  much  as  we  can  ;  and 
not  to  show  our  dislike  of  any  one,  but  to  behave 
civilly  to  all." 

Anna.  "  This  is  certainly  right ;  but  not  with- 
out something  more  ;  for  let  me  just  put  this  case 
to  you : — As  we  are  to  live  in  this  world  but  a 
very  little  while,  and  for  ever  in  the  next,  is  it 
not  more  our  interest  to  please  God,  with  whom, 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  73 

if  we  act  as  we  ought,  we  shall  then  be,  than  it  is 
to  gain  the  favor  of  men,  with  whom  we  are  to 
stay  so  short  a  time  ?  This  life  is  not  to  be  com- 
pared to  Eternity  ;  and  it  depends  not  on  our  fel- 
low-creatures, but  on  the  favor  of  God,  whether 
we  are  to  be  happy  or  miserable  there." 

Charlotte.  (Thoughtfully.)  "  That  is  true  :  but 
if  we  behave  well  to  our  fellow-creatures,  God  is 
pleased — is  not  He  ?" 

Anna.  "  Certainly ;  but  then  it  depends  on  the 
motive  ;  if  we  are  kind  to  men  out  of  love  to  God, 
and  because  He  has  commanded  it,  God  is  pleas- 
ed ;  but  not  if  our  views  extend  only  to  ourselves, 
that  people  should  think  or  speak  well  of  us — 
and  not  if  we  think  that,  if  our  actions  are  pleas- 
ing, it  does  not  signify  what  our  thoughts  are." 

Charlotte  had  never  heard  so  much  of  religion 
explained  before.  The  only  encouragement  which 
had  been  holden  out  to  her  as  a  motive  for  good 
behavior,  was  the  approbation  of  men  ;  and  though 
the  far  superior  one  which  seemed  to  influence 
Anna's  conduct  was  quite  new  to  her,  her  heart 
secretly  acknowledged  its  justice,  and  she  deter- 
mined to  think  more  on  the  subject  when  alone, 
or  at  least  to  read  what  her  friend  had  recom- 
mended with  greater  attention  than  she  at  first 
proposed. 

7 


74  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


"  Sweet  Patience  came,  by  Fortitude  sustain'd  ; 
The  tear  of  meekness  trembled  in  her  eye ; 
But,  cheer'd  by  Hope,  no  longer  she  complain'd  ; 
And,  taught  "by  Faith,  she  placed  each  wish  on  high." 

The  following  week,  the  Miss  Arnolds  left 
Milwood  ;  and  Ellen  and  Anna  were  impatient  to 
return  to  their  former  occupations.  That  very 
evening  they  called  at  Dame  Hunt's  cottage, 
whose  inhabitants  they  had  not  seen  for  some 
days. — They  found  Mary  Forbes,  the  poor  blind 
girl,  quite  happy  at  having  been  taught  a  new 
sort  of  work.  "It  is  weaving  straw,  ma'am." 
said  she,  "  for  the  carters'  hats  : — it  is  very 
coarse  ;  but  I  am  in  hopes  I  shall  make  out  very 
well  at  it." 

Her  good  friends  encouraged  her  in  her  un- 
dertaking, and  then  asked  for  her  sister. 

P  Oh  !  that  is  another  thing  that  makes  me  very 
happy,  ladies,"  answered  the  contented  girl ;  "  for 
she  is  gone  out  to  work ;  and  Dame  Hunt  and  I 
make  out  so  well  together,  you  cannot  think  ;  I 
know  all  about  the  house,  and  Betsy  leaves  every- 
thing in  order,  so  that  I  can  get  what  I  want 
without  troubling  our  poor  old  dame,  who  grows 
very  infirm." 

Mrs.  Irvin  asked  where  Betsy  was  gone,  and 
found,  that  as  she  had,  in  her  mother's  life-time, 
learned  a  little  of  mantua-making,  she  had  farther 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  75 

improved  herself  in  it,  and  that  several  of  the 
farmers'  wives  in  the  neighborhood  employed  her 
by  the  day  in  that  way. 

"  How  good  God  is  to  us,"  continued  Mary, 
"  in  enabling  us  to  live  so  comfortably  !  When 
my  mother  died,  I  little  thought  that  we  should 
have  been  half  so  happy  as  we  are  ;  and  it  is  a 
comfort  to  us  both  that  now  we  can  repay  Dame 
Hunt  for  all  her  kindness  to  us,  when  we  were 
in  so  much  distress  ;  for  she  says,  she  should  not 
know  what  to  do  without  us,  and  often  blesses 
God  for  having  brought  us  to  her  in  her  old  age  ; 
and  I  am  sure  we  have  reason  to  bless  Him  too," 
added  the  grateful  girl. 

When  Mrs.  Irvin  talked  of  returning  home, 
Anna  offered  to  stay  and  read  to  her  young  friend. 
"  Thank  you,  Miss,"  said  she,  "  that  will  be  a 
treat  indeed  ;  for  it  is  in  not  having  somebody  to 
read  to  me,  that  I  miss  Betsy  more  than  anything  ; 
as,  when  she  comes  home  in  the  evening,  she 
has  always  something  or  other  to  do  of  needle- 
work for  Dame  Hunt  or  myself;  she  says  she 
will  have  us  look  tidy,  and  that  no  one  shall  say 
she  works  for  others  and  not  for  us." 

As  Ellen  walked  home  with  her  aunt,  she  could 
not  help  congratulating  herself  on  the  departure  of 
their  visiters.  "  How  much  happier  is  my  life," 
said  she,  "  than  that  which  the  Miss  Arnolds 
describe  !  I  cannot  help  rejoicing  they  are  gone, 
as  I  am  sure  our  employments  gave  them  no 
pleasure." 

"  They  are  much  to  be  pitied,"  said  Mrs  Irvin, 
"  who  know  no  other  pursuit  than  what  they  call 


76  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

pleasure ;  and  still  more  so,  as  they  appear  to 
wish  for  no  other." 

I  hope  my  young  readers  are  all  ready  to  ac- 
knowledge a  life  of  active  benevolence  must  be  a 
happy  one  ;  to  relieve  the  poor,  comfort  the  af- 
flicted, and  to  instruct  the  ignorant,  they  cannot 
doubt  must  be  grateful  to  a  serious  and  well-dis- 
posed mind ;  but  then  perhaps  they  would  wish 
to  add  a  few  of  what  the  world  calls  pleasures  to 
these  more  sublime  gratifications  :  and  though,  at 
the  same  time,  they  are  ready  to  allow  that  the 
amusements  they  are  desirous  to  partake  of  do 
not  always  afford  the  promised  pleasure,  yet  are 
they  more  and  more  eagerly  pursued,  till  at  last 
all  others  are  given  up,  even  those  their  judgment 
once  approved  :  I  mean  those  acts  of  beneficence 
which  are  calculated  to  make  us  happy  at  the 
time,  and  afford  us  many  pleasing  reflections  in 
their  retrospection.  Pursuits  so  contrary  to  each 
other  can  never  be  enjoyed  together  ;  one  or  the 
other  will  be  given  up  :  and  weak  and  frail  as  our 
nature  is,  it  is  much  to  be  feared  that  that  which 
attracts  the  attention  of  the  largest  part  of  this 
world's  inhabitants  will  also  engage  ours,  par- 
ticularly as  it  promises  pleasure  without  any 
trouble  or  self-denial ;  while  those  of  a  more  en- 
larged kind  are  not  without  their  difficulties,  and 
require  a  perseverance  above  the  efforts  of  our 
own  resolution  to  continue  in  them,  contrary  to 
the  opinion  of  many  others,  who  would  draw  us 
after  them  into  the  gulf  of  false  happiness.  But 
let  us  attend  to  the  end  of  Anna's  life,  which  will 
soon  come  to  a  conclusion  ;  and  then  we  shall 
see  whether  she  had  any  reason  to  regret  that 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  77 

she  had  never  tasted  of  the  amusements  of  the 
world. 

It  was  not  long  before  she  fell  into  an  ill  state 
of  health  ;  and  though  unwilling  to  complain,  her 
looks  were  sufficient  to  acquaint  all  who  saw  her 
that  she  was  far  from  well :  instead  of  the  ap- 
pearance of  health  which  once  glowed  on  her 
cheek,  she  was  pale  and  evidently  much  thinner  ; 
and  an  alarming  cough  too  plainly  foretold  an  ap- 
proaching consumption.  Mrs.  Irvin  was  alarmed, 
as  well  as  Ellen,  on  observing  her  countenance  ; 
though  the  invalid  said  all  she  could  to  remove 
their  fears,  and  often  feigned  herself  better,  when 
she  saw  their  uneasiness.  A  physician  was  sent 
for,  who  immediately  recommended  Bristol  as  the 
only  chance  of  her  recovery ;  and  Mrs.  Irvin  de- 
termined to  remove  her  there  as  soon  as  she  could 
possibly  leave  home.  Ellen  was  anxious  to  try 
what  she  fondly  hoped  would  restore  her  sister ; 
and  fearful  of  losing  her,  she  felt  her  affection 
daily  increase.  All  her  favorite  occupations  were 
unattended  to  ;  and  while  she  dreaded  the  con- 
tinuance of  her  sister's  illness,  she  could  think  of 
no  one  else  ; — the  poor  were  neglected  :  neither 
could  she  bear  the  thought  of  going  to  the  school, 
where  her  aunt  had  forbidden  her  sister  to  ac- 
company her,  lest  she  should  be  too  much  fatigued. 

Though  equally  concerned  for  the  cause,  Mrs. 
Irvin  was  grieved  to  see  Ellen's  sorrow ;  and 
though  at  first  unwilling  to  notice  it,  she  found 
herself  obliged  to  speak  seriously  upon  the  sub- 
ject. Going  one  evening  into  Ellen's  room,  she 
found  her  just  risen  from  her  knees,  her  face 
bathed  in  tears. — "  You  have  been  praying  for 
7* 


78  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

greater  resignation  to  the  Divine  will,  my  dear," 
said  she  ;  "  I  have  unwillingly  observed  that  you 
have  lately  discovered  a  great  want  of  it,  or  a 
weakness  of  mind  which  it  is  our  duty  to  endeavor 
to  overcome." 

"  Ah,  how  can  I,  my  dear  aunt  ?"  replied  Ellen, 
her  tears  increasing — "  how  can  I  see  my  dear 
and  only  sister  so  ill,  and  not  feel  the  utmost 
grief?" 

"  I  acknowledge,  my  love,  that  this  is  a  severe 
trial  for  you,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  sitting  down  by 
her,  and  affectionately  taking  her  hand  ;  "  but  re- 
member, my  Ellen,  it  comes  from  God !  it  is  he 
who  gave  her  unto  us,  and  if  it  is  His  will  to  re- 
move her — " 

"  You  think  she  will  die,  then !"  cried  Ellen, 
interrupting  her  aunt ;  "  Good  God,  support  me  !" 
continued  she,  clasping  her  hands  with  unaffected 
sorrow. 

"  That,  my  dear,"  said  her  aunt,  while  she 
kissed  her  wet  cheek,  "  is  a  proper  prayer,  and 
God  will  hear  and  answer  it :  compose  yourself, 
my  child.  She  may  not  be  in  the  danger  our 
fears  suggest ;  next  week  we  shall  go  to  Bristol, 
and  she  may  recover  :  but  if  it  should  please  God 
that  it  should  be  otherwise,  will  you  be  so  selfish 
as  to  regret  her  admission  into  Eternal  Happi- 
ness 1  Remember,  your  situation  in  life  may 
not — nay,  it  cannot  be  expected  to  be  what  it  has 
hitherto  been :  trials  and  temptations  will  arise, 
which,  if  it  should  be  the  will  of  the  Almighty  to 
take  her  to  himself,  Anna  will  escape.  This  has 
been  the  first  affliction  you  have  known,"  contin- 
ued Mrs.  Irvin,  pleased  to  see  Ellen  more  com- 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  79 

posed,  "  and  I  am  happy  in  seeing  you  apply  to 
the  only  sure  source  of  comfort  under  it." 

"  Anna  will  be  happy,"  said  Ellen  :  "  but  does 
my  aunt  think  I  grieve  at  that  ?" 

"  No,  my  dear,  I  think  far  otherwise  ;  I  know 
what  you  feel ;  for  I  have  myself  felt  what  I  once 
thought  the  severest  affliction  : — when  I  dreaded 
the  loss  of  your  dear  and  now  blessed  uncle,  I 
thought  I  should  never  know  happiness  more  : 
but  as  he  had  always  been  my  instructer,  so  then 
he  taught  me  where  to  look  for  support :  and 
when  I  saw  so  good  a  man  dying  in  the  blessed 
prospect  of  a  glorious  Immortality,  through  the 
merits  and  intercession  of  a  merciful  Savior,  I 
checked  my  tears,  and  only  wished  to  live  so  as, 
in  God's  good  time,  I  might  follow  him,  rejoicing 
in  the  same  heavenly  hope.  But  I  am  departing 
from  my  subject :  to  talk  of  the  death  of  so  good 
a  man,  raises  feelings  in  my  mind  which  I- cannot 
describe  ;  yet  they  are  far  from  being  those  of 
sorrow  :  and  may  such,  my  Ellen,  be  yours  when 
time  shall  be  no  more  with  your  sister ! — she  has 
the  same  kind  Savior  on  whom  to  rest  her  confi- 
dence ;  and,  blessed  be  God !  He  is  not  un- 
known, or  unacknowledged  by  either  of  you  !" 

"  Next  to  the  Almighty,  my  dear  aunt,  it  is  to 
you  we  are  indebted  for  so  inestimable  a  know- 
ledge," replied  Ellen,  with  animation,  a  gleam  of 
pleasure  breaking  through  her  tears  :  "  how  highly 
have  we  been  favored  !" 

"  And  is  not  this  recollection  sufficient  to  sup- 
press every  murmur,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin — "  that  we 
know  in  whom  we  have  believed  ?  Oh,  it  is  a 
consolation  which  will  brighten  even  the  parting 


80  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

hour  with  those  we  love,  when  we  see  them  leave 
this  world,  their  hopes  fixed  on  a  firm  foundation, 
and  recollect  their  lives  have  been  an  evidence 
of  those  hopes — that,  though  possessed  of  many- 
frailties,  there  is  no  unrepented  sin  to  darken  that 
bright  horizon  which  will  soon  open  to  their  view, 
never,  never  more  to  know  a  cloud !" 

"  It  is  enough,  my  dear  aunt,"  said  Ellen,  wiping 
her  eyes,  "  it  is  enough  !  Anna  Avill  know  this 
happiness,  and  I  shall  feel  it  too  :  I  will  rejoice 
in  the  reflection  that  she  is  for  ever  happy ;  and 
pray  that  I  may  so  live  as,  when  the  time  of  my 
departure  comes,  I  may  share  it  with  her.  Anna 
is  fit  to  die,  and  I  will  no  longer  mourn." 

"  These  are  precious  testimonies,  my  dear," 
said  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  but  do  not  be  discouraged  if 
desponding  thoughts  should  again  return ; — we 
are  weak  and  mortal  creatures,  nor  can  we  always 
bear  alike  the  evils  of  this  life.  Though  at  times, 
we  feel  strength  in  the  grace  of  God ;  yet  at 
others,  we  sink  under  our  burden :  but  as  we 
have  found  relief  in  prayer,  so  may  we  at  all  times 
apply  to  the  same  source  of  comfort.  We  will 
just  look  in  upon  our  dear  charge,"  added  she, 
"  and  then  we  will  have  family  prayers." 

Anna's  eyes  were  closed  ;  but  by  the  difficulty 
with  which  she  breathed,  they  feared  her  sleep 
was  uneasy :  her  looks  were  wan,  and  Ellen 
again  felt  a  tear  tremble  in  her  eye,  when  she  re- 
flected that  perhaps  in  a  very  short  time  she 
might  see  her  still  paler,  and  when  those  short- 
fetched  breathings  might  no  more  be  heard  : — 
"  She  will  then  be  dead,"  thought  Ellen  ;  "  by, 
her  soul  will  be  with  God  !" 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  81 

Mr.  Herbert  often  called  on  them,  and  Anna 
was  always  pleased  with  his  visits  ;  they  looked 
on  him  in  the  place  of  a  father,  and  both  the  sis- 
ters felt  themselves  comforted  and  strengthened 
by  his  conversation,  which  was  well  adapted  to 
their  situation.  Before,  when  he  called  on  them, 
he  used  to  talk  on  various  subjects  ; — the  books 
they  had  read,  and  the  remarks  they  had  made, 
were  all  discussed  by  this  good  man,  who  thus 
endeavored  to  amuse  and  instruct  their  minds  ; 
but  now,  religion,  and  its  consolations,  were  their 
only  topic.  The  covenant  of  mercy,  which  God 
has  made  with  men  in  sending  His  only  Son  to 
die  for  their  redemption  ;  the  full  atonement  which 
He  has  made  by  His  death  for  the  sins  of  the 
whole  world  ;  and  the  strength  He  has  promised, 
and  imparts  to  all  his  faithful  followers  who  are 
striving  to  do  His  will,  were  subjects  heard  with 
pleasure.  In  short,  all  he  said  was  to  prepare 
his  young  friends  for  the  severe  trial  which  was 
awaiting  them  ;  nor  did  they  shrink  from  the  con- 
templation of  the  gloomy  valley  of  death,  when 
taught  by  their  excellent  instructer  to  look  upon 
it  as  a  passage  to  eternal  life  ; — they  rejoiced  in 
the  prospect,  and  gratefully  acknowledged  a  Sa- 
vior who  had  graciously  given  to  them,  as  well  as 
to  all  His  followers,  a  title  to  so  glorious  an  in- 
heritance. 

Perhaps  it  may  be  thought  that  such  a  subject 
was  quite  improper  for  one  in  Anna's  state,  and  that 
her  mind  should  have  been  diverted  from  it ;  but, 
far  from  raising  melancholy  ideas,  it  elevated  her 
hopes,  and  she  would  often  beg  of  Mr.  Herbert 
to  prolong  the  conversation,  till  she  felt  herself 


82  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

exalted  above  the  pains  her  mortal  state  occa- 
sioned. 

The  whole  village  was  anxious  for  Anna's  re- 
covery ;  and  on  the  morning  on  which  the  ladies 
commenced  their  journey,  the  door  was  crowded 
with  people,  who  came  to  offer  their  good  wishes 
for  the  recovery  of  the  dear  invalid  :  but  Anna 
could  only  return  her  thanks  by  an  expressive 
look  ;  and  when  seated  in  the  carriage,  she  seem- 
ed lost  in  thought,  and  to  forget  that  her  aunt  and 
sister  were  feeling  witnesses  of  her  emotion. 

Mrs.  Irvin  had  hired  a  coach  to  take  them  all 
the  way,  and  Anna  had  one  side  entirely  to 
herself;  where,  supported  by  pillows,  she  bore 
the  fatigue  of  her  journey  better  than  her  anx- 
ious friends  expected.  Martin  also  accompa- 
nied them ;  and  it  was  with  a  heavy  heart  she 
silently  drew  a  comparison  between  the  time  she 
was  last  in  a  carriage  with  her  dear  young  ladies 
and  the  present. 

It  was  nearly  dark  when  they  arrived  at  the 
lodging  which  had  been  taken  for  them  at  Clif- 
ton ;  and  after  taking  a  little  refreshment,  Anna 
was  assisted  to  bed  :  Martin  slept  in  the  same 
room  ;  and  the  adjoining  apartment  Mrs.  Irvin 
chose  for  Ellen  and  herself,  where  they  once 
more  offered  up  their  prayers  to  God  for  the  re- 
covery of  this  beloved  object  of  their  care. 

While  here,  they  made  no  acquaintance,  nor 
did  they  find  Anna  so  much  benefited  by  the 
change  as  they  had  fondly  hoped  they  should. 
After  six  weeks'  stay  she  became  anxious  to  re- 
turn home  ;  and  her  affectionate  aunt,  though  she 
would  have  wished  to  have  tried  the  efficacy  of 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  83 

the  waters,  and  the  salubrious  air  of  Clifton,  a 
little  longer,  did  not  receive  encouragement  from 
the  physician  to  hope  it  would  be  of  any  material 
service  :  she  therefore  complied  with  her  request ; 
and  they  returned  to  Milwood,  with  that  kind  of 
melancholy  pleasure  it  is  difficult  to  describe,  and 
distressing  to  feel.  They  felt  pleased  to  return 
to  their  place  of  residence,  and  where  they  had 
always  found  happiness  in  imparting  it  to  those 
about  them,  who,  with  genuine  expression  of  joy, 
welcomed  their  arrival ;  while  their  regret  at 
Anna's  continued  ill  health  appeared  in  the  coun- 
tenances of  all  who  saw  her. 

The  next  morning  they  were  visited  by  Mr. 
Herbert,  and  he  was. received  by  all  with  un- 
feigned pleasure.  "You  see  me  returned,  Sir," 
said  Anna,  "  not  in  better  health  than  when  I 
went ;  but  I  do  not  feel  any  regret,  as  I  have  not 
forgotten  the  encouraging  hopes  you  have  former- 
ly given  me  :  my  aunt  and  sister,  however,  I  fear, 
are  not  so  resigned  ;  I  observed  last  night  they 
were  less  cheerful  than  I  was  on  coming  home 
again.  I  feel  I  am  soon  to  leave  this  world  ;  but 
wrill  you,  sir,  convince  them  of  my  superior  hap- 
piness,— that  is,  if  you  do  not  think  me  presump- 
tuous in  expecting  it  ?" 

Mr.  Herbert  assured  her  he  thought  her  hopes 
were  well  founded,  and  promised  to  use  all  the 
means  in  his  power  to  reconcile  her  surviving 
friends  to  the  change  she  seemed  so  well  prepar- 
ed for. 

Ellen's  spirits  were  a  little  revived  on  seeing 
her  sister  so  cheerful ;  and  she  acknowledged  the 
goodness  of  God  in  ordaining  the  decline  of  Anna 


84  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

to  be  so  very  gradual. — "  I  shall  be  enabled  to  bear 
with  composure  the  stroke  which  separates  us," 
said  she,  "  whenever  it  comes  ;  and  I  too  plainly 
see  it  cannot  long  be  withholden  :  she  every  day 
grows  weaker,  yet  her  strength  of  mind  increases  : 
Oh,  may  mine  be  also  strengthened  !" 

For  some  weeks  their  situation  appeared  the 
same,  though  Anna  gradually  grew  worse,  and 
was  soon  confined  to  her  apartment.  Here  Mr. 
Herbert  frequently  visited  her  ;  and  though  she 
could  not  talk  as  usual  to  him,  she  received  both 
pleasure  and  comfort  from  his  conversation  with 
her  aunt,  and  the  prayers  he  read  to  her. 

Though  it  was  now  more  than  a  twelve-month 
since  the  Miss  Arnolds  were  at  Milwood,  Anna 
had  not  forgotten  them. — "  I  fear,"  said  she  to  her 
sister,  "  that  Charlotte  has  not  once  thought  of 
me  since  we  parted  ;  but  you,  Ellen,  may  see  her 
again  ;  will  you  tell  her  that,  in  my  last  illness,  I 
thought  often  of  her,  and  would  have  written,  had 
it  been  possible  ?  And  let  her  know  also,"  added 
she,  "  that  in  my  latest  hour  I  felt  more  forcibly 
than  ever,  that  all  other  happiness  than  that  I 
mentioned  to  her  is  but  visionary,  and  that  reli- 
gion, and  a  knowledge  of  the  Scriptures,  are  alone 
capable  of  giving  comfort  at  the  hour  of  death." 

"  There  is  a  Wisdom  from  above,  my  dear," 
said  Mrs.  Irvin,  (who  was  in  the  room  at  the 
time.)  "  which  we  are  encouraged  to  pray  for ; 
and  it  is  this  you  would  have  your  sister  recom- 
mend to  Charlotte  Arnold,  as  well  as  every  other 
friend  she  may  have  any  influence  over  ?" 

"  Yes,  my  dear  aunt,"  returned  the  dying  girl ; 
"  you  have  expressed  my  meaning  much  better 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  85 

than  myself:  but  I  thank  God,"  said  she,  lifting 
her  eyes  to  heaven,  "  I  am  not  ignorant  of  it. — 
There  is  one  thing  more,"  said  she,  hesitatingly, 
"  that  I  would  say  to  my  dear  aunt ; — but  not  now, 
I  am  not  strong  enough  ;  in  the  afternoon,  or  to- 
morrow— if  I  live  so  long." 

Mrs.  Irvin,  seeing  her  extremely  weakened 
by  speaking  so  much,  advised  her  to  wait  till  the 
time  she  mentioned  ;  and  then  begging  her  to  try 
to  get  some  sleep,  she  went  with  Ellen  for  a  little 
air  in  the  garden. 

Their  whole  conversation  was  respecting  Anna. 
"  What  a  sister  shall  I  lose  !"  said  Ellen ;  "  I 
seem  as  if,  till  now,  I  never  knew  her  value  !" 

Mrs.  Irvin  checked  the  complaint  that  appeared 
arising.  "  With  her  last  breath,"  said  she,  "  she 
seems  desirous  to  do  good ;  and  shall  we  regret 
that  she  is  so  soon  to  receive  her  reward  ?" 

"  Oh,  no,"  said  Ellen,  gratefully  resigned  to  the 
will  of  Heaven ;  "  I  will  pray  that  I  may  spend 
the  remainder  of  my  life  in  the  same  earnest  en- 
deavor !" 

When  they  returned  from  their  walk,  on  hear- 
ing from  Martin  that  the  object  of  their  attention 
was  now  asleep,  they  went  not  into  her  room, 
but  continued  below  with  Mr.  Herbert,  who,  ac- 
cording to  his  daily  custom,  had  called  to  know 
how  the  invalid  then  was. 

Betsy  Forbes  was  a  constant  inquirer  in  the 
kitchen,  though  she  did  not  always  see  the  fami- 
ly;  till,  this  afternoon,  Ellen  had  her  into  the 
parlor,  and  by  the  resignation  she  herself  showed, 
prepared  her  soon  to  hear  of  the  death  of  her 
benefactress. — "  My  poor  sister  Mary,"  said  the 
8 


86  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

grateful  girl,  "  how  will  she  bear  this  ?  she  is 
always  talking  of  Miss  Anna's  goodness  in  com- 
ing to  read  to  her." 

"  My  good  girl,"  said  Ellen,  (endeavoring  to 
check  the  tear  that  would  flow,)  "  you  must  not 
talk  so  ;  I  have  need  of  fortitude  to  support  the 
loss  which  is  ordained  me  :  if  Mary  misses  her, 
what  must  I  do  ?  Think  of  this,  my  dear,  and 
console  your  sister,  and  tell  her,  I  will  supply  the 
place  of  mine  to  her." 

Betsy  wept,  as  Ellen  was  speaking,  at  the  re- 
collection of  her  mother's  death. — "  Oh,  my  dear 
Miss,"  said  she,  artlessly,  "  if  I  could  but  give 
you  all  the  comfort  you  were  so  good  as  to  give 
me  when  my  poor  mother  died,  how  gladly  would 
I  do  it ! — but  God  can  give  it  to  you ;  and  1  pray 
that  he  will.  What  is  your  loss  will  be  Miss 
Anna's  gain." 

While  Ellen  was  thus  engaged  with  Betsy 
Forbes,  Mrs.  Irvin  had  visited  Anna's  room,  and 
finding  her  again  awake,  told  Martin  she  would 
herself  sit  with  her  till  the  evening. 

"  This  is  very  good  of  you,  my  dear  aunt," 
said  Anna  :  "  I  have  had  a  very  comfortable  sleep, 
and  think  I  shall  now  be  able  to  tell  you  the  only 
thing  that  remains  upon  my  mind." 

"  What  is  it,  my  love  ?"  said  her  affectionate 
aunt ;  "  speak,  my  Anna,  to  me,  who  love  you  as 
a  mother."     • 

"  Ah,  it  is  a  mother  I  should  speak  of!"  said 
she  :  "  it  is  for  those  who  remain  I  am  anxious  : 
though  it  sometimes  appears  as  if  I  had  never 
seen  my  parents,  yet  I  feel  I  love  them  still ;  will 
you  tell  them  so  ?  and  do  you  think,"  added  she, 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  87 

speaking  still  lower,  "  that  they  will  regret  my 
death  ?" 

"  They  would  have  reason  to  rejoice,  my 
dear,"  replied  her  aunt,  "  did  they  know  how 
well  you  are  prepared  for  it." 

"  Tell  them,  my  dear  aunt,  how  happy  I  die  ! 
and  that  my  earnest  prayer  has  always  been,  that 
we  may  meet  in  Heaven.  I  should  have  wished, 
if  it  had  pleased  my  heavenly  Father,  to  have 
lived  to  see  them  return :  but  I  am  content — I 
hope  I  am — I  pray  to  be  made  so  ;  and  may  I 
not,  my  dear  aunt,  hope  everything  in  regard  to 
them — I  that  have  experienced  such  proofs  of 
God's  mercy  ?  Let  them  know,"  continued  she, 
"  that  I  died  praying  for  blessings  on  them,  and 
trusting  in  my  Redeemer  for  them,  and  for  my- 
self, full  of  humble  hope,  through  his  merits,  to 
meet  them  in  the  courts  above  !  Will  you  tell 
them  all  this,  my  dear  aunt  1  Don't  let  them  for- 
get they  had  a  daughter  Anna. — And  now,  what 
shall  I  say  to  you,  my  best  aunt,  mother,  friend  1 
for  all  these  have  you  been  to  me  !  I  would  ex- 
press my  grateful  sense  of  all  the  kind  instructions 
you  have  given  me,  and  which  I  now  feel  the 
true  force  and  comfort  of ; — but  it  is  impossible  ; 
I  would  thank  you  next  to  God,  and  thank  Him 
for  giving  me  such  a  kind  instructress." 

"  Say  no  more,  my  dearest  love,"  said  Mrs.  Ir- 
vin,  much  affected  ;  "  I  am  sufficiently  comforted 
in  seeing  you  so  sensible  of  the  blessings  you 
have  enjoyed." 

At  this  moment  Ellen  entered  the  room,  her 
face  wet  with  the  tears  her  conversation  with 
Betsy  Forbes  had  occasioned.     "  You  have  not 


88  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

been  weeping  for  me,  my  dear  sister  V  asked  An- 
na, with  concern. 

"  They  are  tears  of  sorrow  mixed  with  joy," 
replied  Ellen,  kissing  her  pallid  cheek :  "  I  re- 
joice in  your  happiness  !" — "  May  it  be  yours  !" 
said  Anna,  faintly  returning  her  embrace  :  "  It  is 
but  a  short  time  before  I  shall  have  the  joy  of 
meeting  you  in  Heaven !" 

Mrs.  Irvin,  fearing  this  lengthened  conversa- 
tion would  too  much  agitate  both  her  nieces,  now 
took  a  book  and  offered  to  read  a  prayer  :  it  was 
every  way  adapted  to  the  dying  bed,  and  conclud- 
ed with  a  petition  for  their  surviving  friends. 

"  My  father  and  mother !"  said  Anna,  softly  ; 
and  lifting  her  eyes  to  Heaven,  she  continued 
some  minutes  silent,  after  her  aunt  had  closed  the 
book. 

Martin  sat  up  with  Anna  that  night ;  and  in 
the  morning  her  account  was  such  as  gave  no 
hope  of  her  continuance  in  this  world  till  the 
next  day.  Her  aunt  and  sister  perceived  a  sen- 
sible alteration  ;  but  still  she  appeared  composed 
and  happy.  "  Remember  me  to  the  good  Mr.  Her- 
bert," said  she  faintly,  "  and  to  all  our  poor  neigh- 
bors, especially  the  Forbes's ;  tell  them  I  have 
prayed  for  them  all. — I  can  scarcely  see  you,  my 
dear  Ellen ;  but  this  is  your  hand,"  added  she, 
pressing  it  to  her  lips  : — "  Farewell,  my  dear,  my 
only  sister  ! — may  we  meet  in  Heaven  !" 

She  then  continued  silent  for  some  time,  while 
Ellen  sat  by  her  bed  :  her  eyes  were  fixed  upon 
her  and  upon  her  aunt  by  turns. — "  This  weak 
breath  of  mine,"  said  she,  putting  her  hand  on  her 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  89 

heart,  "  is  just  expiring ! — Thank  God,  I  leave  the 
world  in  peace  !" 

Martin  approached  the  bed  ;  Anna  knew  her, 
and  in  faltering  accents  thanked  her  for  all  her 
care,  from  infancy  till  now. 

"  Farewell,  all  my  friends !"  said  she ;  and 
casting  a  languishing,  dying  look  on  all  around 
her,  she  closed  her  eyes  ;  and  it  was  by  her  faint 
breathings  only  that  they  still  perceived  that  she 
had  life  remaining. 

All  was  silent !  no  tears  were  shed  ;  and  though 
this  was  the  hour  Ellen  had  so  much  dreaded, 
she  was  enabled  to  contemplate  her  sister's  dying 
countenance  with  calm  composure  ;  till,  with  a 
gentle  sigh,  she  expired,  peaceful  as  the  tender 
infant  sinks  to  rest  on  the  breast  of  its  mother ! 

Her  much-loved  friends  continued  silently 
standing  round  the  bed  ;  and  as  they  marked  the 
livid  hue  of  death  gradually  possessing  her  pale 
and  emaciated  features — "  She  is  now  an  im- 
mortal spirit !"  said  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  let  us  give  God 
thanks  for  the  blessed  death  of  one  so  young,  yet 
so  resigned,  and  pray  that  our  latter  end  may  be 
like  hers !" 

Struck  by  her  words  and  example,  Ellen  and 
Martin  sunk  on  their  knees  ;  when  this  excellent 
woman  read  a  prayer  suited  to  their  situation, 
and  in  which  they  fervently  joined.  After  this 
act  of  devotion,  Ellen  and  her  aunt  kissed  the 
cheek  of  the  departed  saint  and  left  the  room. 

Such  was  the  life  and  death  of  Anna  Stanley, 

who,  at  the  early  age  of  sixteen,  had  attained 

such  a  knowledge  of  her  God  and  Savior  as  alone 

can  render  a  death-bed  happy  :  and  may  it  be  the 

8* 


90  THE   TWIN    SISTERS. 

wish  of  all  my  readers  to  follow  her  example  as 
far  as  may  be  in  their  power !  The  circumstan- 
ces of  her  life  were  favorable  to  piety ;  but  even 
in  situations  most  opposite  to  hers,  time  for  reflec- 
tion and  devotion  may  be  found.  If  some  of  the 
frivolous  employments  of  life  were  given  up, 
what  a  store  of  comfort  might  be  discovered  for 
a  dying  hour  !  and  if  death  were  more  often  made 
the  subject  of  contemplation,  it  would,  on  its  ar- 
rival, be  much  less  the  object  of  terror.  Instead 
of  thinking  what  it  closes  to  us  of  this  world,  let 
us  reflect  on  the  eternal  scenes  it  opens  to  our 
view,  and  ask  our  hearts  what  we  ourselves  have 
to  expect  from  it  ?  If  we  have  fixed  our  hopes 
on  a  right  foundation,  we  may  then  look  forward 
to  our  approaching  end,  as  something  more  than 
a  release  from  worldly  cares  ;  but  without  a  true 
knowledge  of  Religion,  have  we  not  reason  to 
fear  it  will  be  but  the  prelude  to  much  greater  and 
everlasting  sorrows  1 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  91 


CHAPTER  VII. 

" Father  of  Heaven  ! 

Eternal  King  !  Disposer  great  and  good 
Of  life  and  death,  of  happiness  and  wo  ! 
Teach  me,  whate'er  may  be  my  portion  here, 
To  prove  myself  thy  servant !     May  conceit, 
Self-love,  and  pride,  be  strangers  in  my  heart  V1 

The  moment  Mr.  Herbert  heard  of  the  death 
of  his  young  friend,  he  came  to  offer  consolation 
to  the  survivors  ;  but  he  found  them,  as  he  wished, 
composed  and  resigned  to  their  loss.  The  whole 
village  was  grieved  at  her  death  ;  and  on  the  day 
of  her  funeral,  the  church-yard  was  crowded  with 
its  inhabitants,  who  each  repeated  the  good  she 
had  done.  One  recollected  her  kindness  to  her, 
when  all  her  family  were  ill ;  another  talked  of 
the  clothes  she  had  made  for  her  children  ;  and  a 
third  mentioned  a  book  which  she  had  given  her, 
and  which  now  appeared  of  double  value  ;  and 
the  poor  woman  shed  tears,  while  she  declared, 
"  she  would  never  part  with  it,  but  keep  it  for  her 
sake." 

Mr.  Herbert  spent  that  day  with  Mrs.  Irvin  and 
Ellen,  who  now  appeared  to  feel  the  loss  of  her 
sister  more  than  she  thought ;  but  she  was  care- 
ful of  falling  into  the  error  she  so  earnestly  pray- 
ed to  be  kept  from ;  and  though,  when  she  went 
into  the  room  in  which  she  had  been  used  to  see 
one  so  much  loved,  she  could  not  help  a  secret 


92  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

regret  arising,  she  would  immediately  condemn  it 
as  selfish  sorrow,  and  recollecting  her  sister's 
happiness,  endeavor  to  employ  her  mind  in  such 
pursuits  as  would  encourage  her  to  hope  for  a 
participation  of  it.  But  Ellen  was  soon  to  expe- 
rience a  change  of  situation,  which  nothing  but 
the  excellent  principles  she  had  imbibed  could 
have  prevented  from  causing  an  alteration  of  sen- 
timent also,  which,  in  an  hour  of  serious  reflec- 
tion, she  would  have  had  reason  to  regret.  Yet 
I  hope  to  show  my  readers,  that  though  her  mode 
of  living  was  altered,  her  heart  retained  the  same 
desire  of  approving  herself  to  God,  as  when,  in 
the  quiet  village  of  Milwood,  she  had  no  tempta- 
tion, from  opposite  example,  to  do  otherwise. 

Early  in  the  spring  of  the  following  year,  El- 
len's father  and  mother  arrived  in  England,  after 
an  absence  of  nearly  twelve  years.  Mr.  Stanley 
had  considerably  enlarged  his  fortune,  and  he  de- 
termined to  spend  it  in  such  a  manner  as  should 
convince  the  world  he  had  not  lost  that  taste  for 
high  life  which  had  obliged  him  to  go  so  far  to 
procure  the  means  of  continuing  in  it. 

Mrs.  Irvin  trembled  for  her  dear  charge,  when 
she  heard  her  parents'  intention  of  returning 
home,  and  of  which  she  was  informed  but  a  few 
months  previous  to  their  coining.  Mrs.  Stanley's 
letter  was  short,  but  it  spoke  of  the  style  of  liv- 
ing they  meant  to  adopt,  and  expressed  a  pleasure 
in  the  thought  of  introducing  her  daughters  to  the 
world. 

Mrs.  Irvin  was  sitting,  with  her  sister's  letter 
in  her  hand,  contemplating  the  future  destiny  of 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  93 

her  niece,  for  whom  she  felt  an  increased  attach- 
ment, and  who  was  now  become  her  beloved  com- 
panion, assistant,  and  friend,  as  well  as  the  dearest 
object  of  her  care  ;  when  Ellen,  who  had  visited  the 
school  that  morning,  entered  the  room.  She  saw 
her  aunt's  anxious  countenance,  and  earnestly- 
asked  the  cause.  Mrs.  Irvin  could  scarcely  re- 
frain from  tears.  "  Oh,  my  dear  Ellen,"  said  she, 
"  I  am  going  to  lose  you ! — a  letter  from  your 
mother — " 

Ellen's  affectionate  heart  immediately  took  the 
alarm  : — "  Are  they  returning  ?"  she  eagerly  in- 
quired. 

It  would  be  difficult  to  describe  her  feelings 
on  receiving  Mrs.  Irvin's  answer.  Fear  and  hope 
prevailed ;  though  the  latter  was  far  less  predom- 
inant, particularly  when  she  saw  the  grief  her 
aunt  could  not  conceal. 

There  are  times  when  even  the  strongest  minds 
feel  it  difficult  to  support  an  unexpected  stroke. 
This  may  convince  us,  that  in  ourselves  we  are 
ever  weak  and  frail  creatures. 

Mrs.  Irvin  drew  Ellen  to  her  arms,  and  with 
tears  in  her  eyes  said,  "  How,  my  child,  shall  I 
part  with  you,  who  have  been  my  companion  for 
so  many  years  ?" 

Ellen's  heart  overflowed  at  these  words  ;  and 
at  that  moment  a  sensibility,  perhaps  too  much 
indulged,  seemed  to  prevail  in  each. 

"  And  will  be  still,"  said  she  :  "  what  pleasure 
shall  I  know  away  from  you  ?  I  know  nothing 
of  my  parents :  you  are  my  more  than  mother, 
my  dearest  aunt ;  you  have  always  treated  me  as 
your  child,  and  I  cannot  leave  you ;  it  is  my  duty 


94  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

to  stay  with  you ;  affection,  gratitude,  everything 
commands  it ;  here,  I  have  occupations  which  are 
serviceable  ;  my  parents  do  not  want  my  compa- 
ny or  my  assistance." 

She  was  going  on  in  this  strain,  so  consonant 
with  her  present  feelings,  and  laying  out  for  her- 
self a  line  of  duty  contrary  to  that  which  her 
cooler  judgment  would  have  allowed  to  be  right, 
when  Mrs.  Irvin,  whose  returning  reason  seemed 
to  awaken  her  as  from  a  dream,  with  one  word, 
or  rather  look,  broke  the  delusion. 

Ellen  had  ever  been  accustomed  to  watch  her 
aunt's  countenance,  and  there  to  read  her  opinion. 
"  I  have  been  wrong,"  said  she,  humbly. 

"  We  have  both  been  wrong,  my  dear,"  replied 
Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  our  natural  feelings  too  nearly  over- 
came us  :  alas  !  how  often  do  they  lead  us  into 
error !  Your  duty  is  to  comply  with  the  wishes 
of  your  parents,  and  in  this  respect  to  obey  their 
commands  ;  mine,  is  to  submit  to  the  disposal  of 
Providence  at  all  times,  and  in  all  things." 

"  And  mine  too,"  continued  Ellen  ;  "  God  will, 
I  hope,  enable  us  to  do  so  :  but,  oh,  my  dear  aunt, 
what  a  change  shall  I  experience  !" 

"  You  have  looked  to  the  right  source  of  hope 
and  assistance  in  it,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin. 

The  letter  was  now  read  by  Ellen,  whose  heart 
beat  at  the  expressions  her  mother  used  when 
speaking  of  their  future  life,  though  not  with 
pleasing  expectations  of  its  gayeties.  She  wTas 
well  convinced  that  happiness,  if  at  all  in  this 
life,  was  to  be  found  in  the  service  of  our  Crea- 
tor, and  in  the  daily  discharge  of  domestic  duty 
rather  than  in  the  splendid  wralks  of  dissipation. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  95 

Mr.  Herbert  was  soon  informed  of  the  impor- 
tant event  which  awaited  our  heroine  :  and,  like 
her  aunt,  he  trembled  for  her,  and  felt  regret  at 
losing  her  society.  He  advised  her  not  to  depend 
too  much  on  her  present  sincere  determination  to 
avoid  every  appearance  of  evil.  "  We  are  safest," 
said  he,  "  when  we  fear  for  ourselves  ;  for  then 
we  are  led  to  pray  for  greater  strength  than  our 
own,  and  we  are  careful  of  our  hearts,  lest  we 
forget  on  what  ground  we  stand.  You  have  been 
used,"  continued  he,  "  to  think  every  moment  of 
your  time  precious  ;  you  will  not,  therefore,  if 
you  can  help  it,  suffer  any  to  be  misused  ;  and 
though  it  may  not  always  be  in  your  power  to 
employ  it  as  you  could  wish,  there  are  hours 
which  you  may  undoubtedly  take  to  yourself :  for 
instance,  you  have  been  accustomed  to  early  ris- 
ing, but  the  fashionable  ladies,  I  am  told,  spend 
half  the  morning  in  bed  : — you  certainly  may  call 
this  time  your  own,  and  thanks  to  your  aunt,  you 
know  how  to  employ  it." 

"  But  on  Sundays,"  said  Ellen,  "  what  shall  I 
do  then  ?  Here  I  spend  them  as  I  ought ;  but 
in  town,  I  dare  say,  I  shall  not  go  to  church  at 
all." 

"  I  hope  you  will,  my  dear,"  said  this  excellent 
friend  :  "if  you  gain  the  affection  of  your  parents, 
though  they  may  not  often  go  themselves,  I  dare 
say  they  will  not  refuse  your  having  a  servant  to 
attend  you  there  :  and  most  likely  you  will  have 
an  apartment  of  your  own  to  which  you  may  re- 
tire ;  and  there,  at  least,  you  may  continue  those 
religious  exercises  to  which  you  have  been  accus- 
tomed." 


96  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

"  What  comfort  you  give  me,  my  dear  sir !" 
said  Ellen  :  "  it  will  be  a  pleasure  indeed,  if  I 
can  in  any  measure  pursue  the  plan  I  have  been 
used  to." 

"  But  the  places  of  fashionable  amusement," 
said  Mrs.  Irvin,-*-"  the  balls,  the  plays,  and  the 
opera  ;  must  my  Ellen  attend  all  these  ?  How 
will  her  own  apartment  appear  to  her  after 
these  !" 

"  These  are  snares,"  replied  Mr.  Herbert,  "  to 
those  who  have  only  a  superficial  knowledge  of 
religion  and  its  sublime  enjoyments.  They  may, 
to  our  young  adventurer,  have  the  charm  of  nov- 
elty, and  perhaps  for  a  while  attract  her  attention  ; 
but,  in  the  hour  of  reflection,  Ellen  will  see  the 
vanity  and  folly,  not  to  say  worse,  of  these  things  ; 
and  her  own  experience  will  convince  her  that 
our  report  concerning  them  is  true.  We  shall 
often  write,"  continued  he,  with  a  smile,  "  and  ask 
her  if  she  does  not  find  it  so  ?" 

"  And  will  you  write  to  me  yourself,  sir  ?"  said 
Ellen,  delighted  with  this  hint :  "  how  proud  shall 
I  be  to  hear  from  you  !  and  my  aunt  has  prom- 
ised to  write  every  week.  I  think  I  shall  be  hap- 
py," added  she  ;  "  I  do  not  now  seem  to  fear  my 
removal  so  much  as  I  did :  in  a  little  time  I  shall 
anticipate  only  good  from  it." 

"  Remember,  my  dear,"  returned  Mr.  Herbert, 
"  that  good  and  evil  are  blended  in  this  life  :  nev- 
er expect  one  without  the  other  ;  and  forget  not 
to  apply  to  your  Heavenly  Father  for  support  in 
both.  It  is  not  in  the  time  of  adversity  alone  that 
we  want  his  assistance ;  our  greatest  danger  is 
in  prosperity." 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  97 

Ellen  thanked  him  for  his  caution.  "  How 
often  shall  I  need  your  friendly  counsel,"  said  she, 
"  when  I  have  left  this  place  !" 

"  I  will  give  you  one  more  motive  for  persever- 
ing in  the  path  of  duty,"  resumed  he,  "  and  that 
the  most  powerful : — Remember  in  what  society 
you  hope  your  dear  departed  sister  is, — she  whom 
you  best  loved  on  earth  :  and  that,  at  her  death, 
your  only  consolation  was  the  thought  of  her  hap- 
piness ;  and  your  earnest  prayer  was,  that  you 
might  so  follow  her  example  as  hereafter  to  share 
it  with  her !  She  is  taken  from  the  trials  you 
will  probably  have  to  encounter :  but  the  same 
Wisdom  which  saw  fit  to  take  her,  will  guide  you 
through  them.  Remember  your  highest  hopes, 
my  dear  child,"  continued  he,  with  great  serious- 
ness, "  and  let  not  the  vain  pleasures  of  the 
world  draw  you  from  their  only  sure  foundation 
— Faith  in  Christ,  and  obedience  to  his  com- 
mands." 

Ellen's  tears  bore  witness  to  the  attention  she 
paid  to  this  solemn  address  ;  and  though  she  was 
too  much  affected  to  make  any  answer,  as  soon 
as  Mr.  Herbert  had  left  the  house  she  retired  to 
her  room,  and  on  her  knees  implored  the  direc- 
tion of  the  Almighty,  and  that  Divine  assistance 
he  had  so  impressively  encouraged  her  to  ask. 

The  succeeding  weeks  passed  quickly  away  in 
the  eyes  of  Ellen  ;  and  it  was  soon  known  through- 
out the  village  that  she  was  going  to  leave.  All 
its  inhabitants  expressed  their  regret  when  the 
unwelcome  news  was  confirmed  by  herself;  but 
she  promised  never  to  forget  her  old  friends,  and 
9 


98  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

hoped  that  she  should  at  least  spend  a  part  of  ev- 
ery summer  with  them. 

In  a  short  time,  the  account  of  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Stanley's  arrival  in  England  reached  Milwood, 
and  Ellen  knew  not  whether  to  smile  or  sigh,  as 
she  read  in  the  papers  of  the  large  retinue  they 
had  brought  with  them,  and  that  they  had  taken 
up  their  residence  at  Mr.  Arnold's  till  their  own 
house  in  Grosvenor-square  was  ready  for  their  re- 
ception. 

The  next  day  brought  a  letter  from  Mrs.  Stan- 
ley to  her  sister,  expressing  her  regret  for  the 
death  of  Anna,  of  which  Mrs.  Arnold  had  inform- 
ed her,  and  hoping  that,  in  the  course  of  the  next 
fortnight,  she  should  have  an  opportunity  of  thank- 
ing her  in  person  for  the  kind  and  affectionate 
care  she  had  taken  of  her  children  ;  when  she 
should,  with  Mr.  Stanley,  visit  Milwood,  for  the 
purpose  of  receiving  their  remaining  daughter 
from  her  hands  ;  at  which  time  they  hoped  their 
own  house  would  be  ready  to  receive  them  on 
their  return. 

All  this  Mrs.  Irvin  had  expected  to  hear  ;  and 
she  communicated  the  intelligence  to  Ellen  with 
composure,  which  the  affectionate  girl  tried  to  im- 
itate. She  proposed  writing  to  her  parents,  to 
welcome  their  arrival  ;  and,  after  many  letters  be- 
gun, none  of  which  she  thought  respectful  enough, 
one  was  concluded  and  sent  to  the  post-office. 

The  next  week  she  could  not  help  expecting 
an  answer,  though  her  aunt  endeavored  to  make 
her  think  that  the  various  occupations  of  her 
mother,  and  the  many  friends  she  would  have  to 
congratulate  on  her  return,  together  with  the  pros- 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  99 

pect  of  their  early  meeting,  would  prevent  her 
writing  ;  and  she  was  obliged  to  satisfy  herself 
with  these  conjectures,  as  no  answer  arrived,  and 
the  fortnight  was  now  elapsed  in  which  they  had 
appointed  to  come.  Ellen  employed  herself  ev- 
ery day  in  forming  plans  for  her  future  conduct. 
She  selected  those  books  she  had  learned  most 
from,  and  had  greatest  pleasure  in  perusing,  to 
take  with  her :  and  her  music  was  examined 
again  and  again,  not  only  to  take  what  she  her- 
self approved,  but  what  she  thought  her  father 
and  mother  would  like  to  hear  her  play.  She 
visited  every  house  in  the  village,  repeating  her 
promise  of  remembering  them  when  she  was  far 
away  ;  and  with  Mary  Forbes  she  spent  a  little 
time  almost  every  evening,  in  endeavoring  to  rec- 
oncile her  to  her  loss. 

At  length  a  servant  of  Mr.  Stanley  arrived,  as 
the  harbinger  of  their  approach  ;  and  when  Mar- 
tin came  in  to  deliver  the  letter  he  had  brought, 
she  was  nearly  as  much  agitated  as  her  young 
mistress. — "  You  cannot  think  what  a  fine  livery 
he  has,  Miss  !"  said  she,  hardly  knowing  what 
she  spoke  :  "  Would  you  like  to  see  him  ?  if  you 
go  to  the  window  on  the  stairs,  you  may,  as  he 
comes  from  the  stables  ;  for  John  is  gone  there 
with  him,  to  put  his  horse  in." 

Ellen  was  going  to  reply,  when  Mrs.  Irvin, 
having  read  the  letter,  gave  it  to  her.  "  They 
will  be  here  to-night,"  said  she  ;  and  speaking  to 
Martin,  she  ordered  her  to  see  that  the  best  apart- 
ment was  ready  for  their  reception,  and  that  ano- 


100  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

ther  bed  was  made  up  for  Miss  Arnold,  whom 
they  were  to  bring  with  them. 

Martin  left  the  room ;  and  Ellen,  with  a  trem- 
bling voice,  said,  "  They  will  be  here  in  two  or 
three  hours,  I  dare  say." 

"  Yes,  my  dear,1'  replied  Mrs.  Irvin,  "  and  you 
will,  I  hope,  compose  yourself,  and  behave  as 
you  ought.  You  see,"  continued  she,  "  your 
mother  makes  an  apology  for  not  answering  your 
letter,  and  has  brought  Miss  Arnold  with  her  ; 
thinking,  as  an  old  acquaintance,  you  would  be 
glad  to  see  her." 

"  I  want  to  see  nobody,"  said  Ellen ;  "  I  think 
I  never  was  so  frightened  in  my  life  !"  and  she 
burst  into  tears.  Mrs.  Irvin  felt  for  her  ;  but  she 
was  not  sorry  to  see  this  effect  of  her  agitation, 
as  she  hoped  it  would  relieve  and  calm  her  mind. 
Nor  was  she  disappointed :  in  a  few  moments 
she  dried  her  eyes.  "  I  will  not  fear,"  said  she  : 
"  why  should  1 1 — In  three  hours,  do  you  think 
they  will  be  here  ?"  added  she,  as  she  walked  to 
the  window,  and  then  to  the  glass.  It  was  al- 
most the  first  time  in  her  life  that  she  had  looked 
into  it  with  any  anxiety.  "  I  wonder  how  my 
parents  would  like  to  see  me  dressed  ?"  said  she  ; 
"  I  should  not  like  to  appear  very  awkward  in 
their  eyes  ;  but  I  know  nothing  of  the  fashion." 

Mrs.  Irvin  advised  her  not  to  indulge  these 
thoughts,  but  rather  to  sit  down  to  her  instrument, 
and  endeavor  to  cheer  her  spirits  by  music.  After 
playing  a  little  while  she  accompanied  her  aunt 
to  the  apartments  prepared  for  their  guests,  and 
then  retiring  to  her  own,  she  once  more  implored 
the  protection  and  assistance  of  the  Almighty,  till, 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  101 

with  a  heart  quite  strengthened,  she  returned  to 
her  aunt,  who  rejoiced  to  see  her  brightened 
countenance ;  and  they  sat  reanimating  each  other, 
till  they  heard  the  sound  of  the  carriage  approach- 
ing the  outer  gate.  Ellen's  color  changed,  as  she 
saw  her  father's  servant  with  her  aunt's  running 
to  conduct  them  to  the  door. 

"  It  will  soon  be  over,"  said  she  to  herself;  "  in 
one  minute  I  shall  see  my  parents  !" 

Mrs.  Irvin  went  to  meet  them  in  the  hall :  but 
Ellen  was  unable  to  follow ;  she  almost  fainted 
when  she  heard  the  voice  of  her  mother  as  she 
entered  the  house  ;  and  had  not  Miss  Arnold, 
who  was  curious  to  witness  her  feelings,  come  in 
to  her,  while  Mrs.  Irvin  conducted  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Stanley  to  another  parlor,  she  could  not  have  re- 
covered herself. 

The  appearance  of  Miss  Arnold  seemed  to  en- 
courage her,  and  she  returned  her  cold  salute 
with  real  affection.  "  This  is  very  good  of  you," 
said  she  ;  "  but  where  is  my  mother  1  I  thought 
I  heard  her  voice." 

"  Come  with  me,  my  dear,"  said  this  now  wel- 
come guest ;  "  I  will  introduce  you ;  she  is  im- 
patient to  see  you !" 

Ellen  attempted  to  move,  and  again  panted  for 
breath.     "  I  am  so  frightened  !"  said  she. 

"  I  can  imagine  your  feelings,"  returned  Miss 
Arnold  :  "  but  indeed  there  is  no  cause  of  fear  ; 
you  will  soon  find  your  mother  all  you  wish." 

"  Ah  !"  thought  Ellen,  "  if  I  could  !"  as  she  was 
hurried  across  the  hall  by  her  young  friend,  who, 
opening  the  door  of  the  room  in  which  Mrs.  Stan- 
ley was,  said,  "  I  have  brought  Ellen,  ma'am ; 
9* 


102  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

she  was  so  much  alarmed  and  agitated,  or  she 
would  have  come  before." 

The  trembling  girl  lifted  up  her  eyes  as  she 
entered  behind  her  conductress,  and  felt  her 
courage  revive  on  seeing  her  aunt's  placid  coun- 
tenance. 

Mrs.  Irvin  turned  to  the  lady  who  sat  next  her, 
and  whose  eyes  were  fixed  on  Ellen  ;  "  Here, 
my  dear  sister,  is  your  daughter,"  said  she,  "  and 
mine  also ;  for  you  must  allow  me  to  call  her  so, 
I  love  her  as  such :"  and  putting  Ellen's  hand  in 
that  of  Mrs.  Stanley,  she  added,  "  let  me  share 
her  love  with  you." 

"  At  present,"  said  Mrs.  Stanley,  "  you  have 
the  largest  claim  to  all :  but  I  hope,"  added  she, 
drawing  her  agitated  child  toward  her,  "  I  shall 
in  future  obtain  it  likewise." 

"  O  my  dear  mother  !"  said  Ellen,  sinking  on 
her  knees  before  her,  "  that  I  may  deserve  yours  !" 
— was  all  she  could  say. 

Mrs.  Stanley  seemed  affected,  and  raising  her 
from  the  posture  she  was  in,  kissed  her  with 
emotion. 

Mr.  Stanley  now  entered;  and  observing  Ellen 
seated  by  her  mother,  he  said,  "  Is  this  our  daugh- 
ter, Mrs.  Irvin  ?  Upon  my  honor,  her  appearance 
makes  my  absence  from  England  seem  long  in- 
deed !  why,  she  is  quite  a  young  woman !"  and 
as  Ellen  rose  to  approach  him,  he  met  her  with 
all  the  politeness  of  a  man  of  fashion,  though  not 
with  the  affection  of  a  father ;  and  taking  her 
hand  he  put  it  to  his  lips,  and  led  her  again  to 
her  seat. 

Ellen  was  astonished.     "  Is  this  the  way  all 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  103 

fathers  meet  their  children  ?"  thought  she  :  "  sure- 
ly mine  takes  me  for  some  one  else ;"  and  she 
looked  at  her  aunt  to  speak  for  her. 

Mrs.  Irvin  felt  hurt,  and  said,  "  Ellen  receives 
you  but  coolly,  Mr.  Stanley :  but  her  actions  at 
present  ill  accord  with  her  heart ;  it  is  there  she 
wishes  to  show  you  all  the  duty  of  a  child." 

"  I  am  not  sure,"  returned  Mr.  Stanley,  "  that 
I  shall  wish  to  receive  it :  to  have  such  a  great 
girl  calling  me  father,  would  make  me  appear 
quite  old ;  on  the  contrary,  I  assure  you,  your 
sister  and  myself  are  returned  very  young :  the 
years  we  have  spent  abroad,  we  do  not  mean  to 
reckon  in  our  lives." 

Again  Ellen  was  surprised,  as  her  father  once 
more  approached  her,  and  added,  "  Therefore,  my 
dear  child,  you  should  have  been  but  six  or  eight 
years  old,  and  then,  perhaps,  I  might  have  owned 
you ;  but  as  it  is,  I  believe  you  must  be  only 
my  younger  sister.  Mrs.  Stanley,  what  say  you 
to  this  arrangement  ?" 

"  A  very  good  plan,"  answered  she  ;  "  for,  upon 
my  word,  now  I  think  of  it,  I  should  be  ashamed 
of  my  age,  were  I  to  introduce  her  as  my 
daughter." 

11  Whatever  I  may  be  in  the  eyes  of  the  world, 
my  dear  madam,"  answered  Ellen,  gathering  cour- 
age, "  I  hope  neither  you  nor  my  dear  father  will 
deny  me  the  affection  I  may  claim  as  your  child  : 
it  shall  be  my  endeavor  to  deserve  it ; — and  in- 
deed," added  she,  observing  them  smile,  "  I  am 
not  so  very  old,  though  I  am  tall ;  consider  how 
I  have  been  educated." 

"Very  true,"  returned  Mr.  Stanley,  who  ap- 


104  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

peared  pleased  with  what  she  had  said ,  "  I  can 
see  you  have  not  been  brought  very  forward,  and 
therefore  I  believe  I  may  venture  to  salute  you 
as  my  daughter — at  least  for  the  present."  And 
with  these  words  he  kissed  her  cheek,  and  again 
led  her  to  her  seat. 

Though  Mr.  Stanley's  manner  was  not  such 
as  Mrs.  Irvin  could  entirely  approve,  yet  she  was 
pleased  to  observe  that  he  seemed  satisfied  with 
the  appearance  of  Ellen,  and  was  remarkably  at- 
tentive to  her  all  the  evening. 

On  entering  the  other  parlor  where  tea  and 
coffee  had  been  ordered,  Miss  Arnold,  who  had 
been  a  silent  spectator  to  the  above  scene,  ex- 
pressed great  pleasure  at  beholding  the  instru- 
ment, « her  old  friend,"  as  she  termed  it ;  and 
promised  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  much  satisfaction 
on  hearing  their  daughter  perform  on  it. 

After  tea,  Ellen  played  some  of  her  best  pie- 
ces ;  and  both  father  and  mother  were  agreeably 
surprised  to  find  their  expectations  had  not  been 
too  highly  raised. 

The  evening  passed  off  better  than  Mrs.  Irvin 
supposed  ;  and  before  they  separated  for  the  night, 
Ellen  attended  her  mother  to  her  apartment,  and 
begged  to  introduce  Martin  to  her. 

Mrs.  Stanley  received  this  faithful  servant  of 
her  children  with  some  appearance  of  satisfac- 
tion ;  and  now  for  the  first  time  thought  of  poor 
Anna,  whom  she  had  left  with  Ellen  under  her 
care. 

Martin  could  have  talked  for  ever  of  her  late 
charge ;  but  Mrs.  Stanley  expressed  herself  fa- 
tigued with  her  journey,  and  they  soon  left  her. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  105 

When  they  went  to  bed,  Miss  Arnold  desired 
Ellen  would  come  with  her  into  her  room,  where, 
with  many  expressions  of  regard,  she  asked  her, 
"  If  she  was  not  delighted  with  the  thought  of  re- 
turning to  town  with  them. — Don't  you  vrish  to 
know  when  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  talk  of  going  ?" 
said  she  ;  "  they  will  not  stay  more  than  one  day  ; 
they  said  so  on  their  journey  :  and  indeed  I  was 
sure  this  stupid  place  would  not  suit  them ; — for- 
give me,  my  dear,  but  now  you  are  going  from  it, 
I  may  say  so ; — we  shall  soon  show  you  what 
life  is." 

Ellen  sighed,  and  said,  "  Only  one  day  will 
they  stay  1     I  hoped  at  least  a  week." 

"  Why,  you  are  to  go  with  us,  you  know,"  an- 
swered Miss  Arnold ;  "  and  to  London  !  only 
think  of  that." 

"  I  wish  I  could  with  more  pleasure  than  I 
do,"  answered  Ellen  ;  "  but  this  place  has  much 
greater  charms  for  me  ; — my  sentiments  are  not 
changed  since  the  summer  you  were  here,"  added 
she,  with  a  smile  ;  "  you  know  then  I  did  not 
wish  to  leave  it ;  and  now  to  go  from  my  aunt 
seems  worse  than  ever !" 

Her  gay  companion  in  vain  endeavored  to  make 
her  think  otherwise  ;  and  Ellen  was  glad  to  wish 
her  good  night,  and  retire  to  her  own  room,  where 
she  found  her  aunt  waiting  to  have  a  little  con- 
versation with  her  before  she  retired  to  rest. 

Ellen  told  her  what  she  had  heard,  and  her 
aunt  confirmed  her  fears  by  saying,  Mr.  Stanley 
had  mentioned  the  time  of  their  return ;  but  at 
the  same  moment  she  would  have  removed  them, 
Ellen  looked  as  if  she  wished  to  ask,  what  was 


106  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

her  opinion  of  the  reception  she  had  met  with ; 
and  Mrs.  Irvin  tried  to  raise  her  hopes  from  it. 
— "  You  had  no  right  to  expect  very  warm  affec- 
tion in  your  parents,"  said  she,  "  separated  at 
such  an  early  age  from  them ;  but  from  your 
father  I  hope  you  will  meet  with  encouragement, 
and  from  your  mother  increased  regard :  I  joy- 
fully observed  your  father's  look  of  approbation 
while  you  were  playing,  and  presage  great  things 
from  it ;  he  will  not  long  think  you  too  tall  and 
too  old  to  be  his  daughter,  but  will  be  proud  to 
call  you  so." 

Thus  did  this  affectionate  aunt  endeavor  to 
raise  the  spirits  of  her  dejected  niece,  and  after 
commending  her  to  the  care  of  Providence,  left 
her  to  herself. 

The  next  morning  they  spent  some  hours  to- 
gether before  their  visiters  arose,  and  at  Ellen's 
earnest  entreaty  she  promised  that,  if  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Stanley  asked  her,  she  would  accompany 
them  to  town,  and  see  her  comfortably  settled  in 
her  father's  house. 

This  grant,  so  unexpectedly  gained,  quite  ex- 
hilarated Ellen's  spirits  ;  and  she  met  her  parents 
at  breakfast  with  a  cheerful  air  of  unrestraint, 
and  was  able  to  talk  of  their  future  plans  with 
pleasure. 

In  the  course  of  the  day  Mrs.  Stanley  men- 
tioned that  the  succeeding  one  was  fixed  for 
their  return  :  but  if  Mrs.  Irvin  would  allow  them 
the  favor  of  her  company,  they  would  prolong 
their  stay  till  the  following  morning.  Ellen  could 
not  help  repeating  their  supplication ;  "  Do,  my 
dear  aunt,"  said  she,  "  pray  do." 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  107 

"  What  are  you  so  pathetically  imploring,  my 
dear  ?"  said  her  father,  who  had  not  been  attend- 
ing to  their  conversation. 

The  request  for  Mrs.  Irvin's  company  was 
again  repeated,  and  he  joined  in  the  entreaty  ; 
"  For  Ellen's  sake,  I  know  you  will,"  said  he. 

This  was  a  plea  Mrs.  Irvin  was  not  inclined  to 
refuse  ;  and  coming  from  him  also,  it  acted  with 
its  full  force  :  she  gave  her  consent,  and  the 
whole  party  expressed  their  pleasure.  As  for 
Ellen,  she  was  delighted :  it  was  what  till  now 
she  had  not  thought  of  asking  ;  and,  after  having 
feared  that  the  next  day  she  must  have  been 
entirely  separated  from  her  aunt,  it  appeared 
as  a  reprieve  from  all  that  was  terrible  !  She 
chatted  with  Miss  Arnold,  sang  her  most  lively 
airs,  and  her  parents  had  no  reason  to  complain 
that  she  was  too  serious. 

After  dinner,  Mrs.  Stanley  brought  into  the 
room  several  handsome  presents,  the  produce  of 
the  Indies,  of  which  she  begged  her  sister's  ac- 

'  BO 

ceptance  :  nor  was  Martin  forgotten  in  the  dis- 
tribution. 

As  it  was  a  very  fine  evening,  Ellen  persuaded 
her  parents  and  Miss  Arnold  to  take  a  little  walk  ; 
and  though  she  did  not  lead  them  into  the  village, 
several  of  the  poor  people,  on  hearing  of  their 
approach,  gathered  together  in  the  road  to  see 
Miss  Ellen's  "  fine  company,"  as  they  were  called. 

On  their  return  to  the  house,  they  found  Mr. 
Herbert,  who  had  been  for  some  days  absent 
from  Milwood,  and,  on  his  coming  home,  hasten- 
ed to  hear  if  his  young  friend  had  yet  left  it.  Mrs. 
Irvin  made  him  promise  to  stay  the  remainder  of 


108  THE  TWIN  SISTERS 

the  evening  ;  and  on  her  sister's  entrance,  intro- 
duced this  worthy  man,  as  one  of  their  first 
friends.  Mrs.  Stanley  received  him  with  a  cold 
civility  ;  and,  while  she  recollected  his  kindness 
to  her  in  her  early  youth,  endeavored  to  express 
a  pleasure  she  did  not  feel  at  again  seeing  him. 

This  evening  and  the  next  day  passed  off  but 
heavily  to  the  London  party ;  while  Ellen,  early 
in  the  morning,  walked  to  the  village,  to  bid  adieu 
to  all  her  humble  friends  ;  and  leaving  them  with 
tears  in  her  eyes,  she  repeated  her  former  pro- 
mises of  remembrance. 

Martin,  that  day,  had  full  employment  in  put- 
ting up  Ellen's  and  her  aunt's  clothes,  with  all 
that  Ellen  had  desired  might  be  sent  after  her  ; 
and  she  thought  of  the  next  morning  with  less 
apprehension  than  she  could  have  imagined. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  109 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

"  Still,  as  through  life's  perplexing  maze  I  stray, 
Be  thou  the  guiding  star  to  mark  my  way  ! 
Conduct  the  steps  of  my  unguarded  youth, 
And  point  their  motions  to  the  paths  of  Truth." 

E.  Carter. 

About  nine  o'clock  the  next  morning,  the 
whole  party  were  in  Mr.  Stanley's  travelling 
coach,  and  arrived  in  London  before  the  close 
of  the  evening. 

Ellen  was  astonished  at  the  magnificence  of 
the  streets  through  which  they  passed.  The 
carriage  stopped  at  a  large  house  in  Grosvenor- 
square ;  when  they  alighted,  and  were  shown 
into  a  very  handsome  drawing-room,  where  they 
found  the  other  Miss  Arnold  waiting  their  arrival. 
She  welcomed  Mrs.  Irvin  and  Ellen  with  great 
cordiality,  and  particularly  congratulated  the  latter 
on  her  emancipation  from  the  country. 

This  evening  all  was  hurry  and  confusion ; 
and  Mrs.  Irvin  was  glad  to  retire  early  with  her 
niece. 

When  they  were  alone,  each  seemed  uncom- 
fortable, though  both  were  unwilling  to  assign  the 
cause  of  their  uneasiness,  and  the  fatigue  of  their 
journey  served  as  an  excuse  for  their  silence. 

The  next  morning  the  bustle  in  the  house  was 
still  greater.  Mr.  Stanley  found  many  things 
10 


110  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

which  he  had  ordered  for  his  own  accommodation 
not  done  :  this  put  him  out  of  humor,  and  the  ser- 
vants were  flying  for  the  workmen  to  come  and 
receive  his  orders.  His  lady  was  all  the  morn- 
ing in  her  dressing-room,  directing  her  maid  how 
she  should  ornament  her  table  and  glass,  and  see- 
ing her  clothes  laid  smooth  in  her  wardrobe. 

Ellen  also  had  her  things  brought  to  her  apart- 
ment ;  but  she  felt  no  inclination  to  arrange  them. 

"  It  will  be  an  amusement  to  me  some  time 
hence,"  said  she  ;  and  her  mind  reverted  to  the 
day  her  aunt  would  leave  her,  though  she  feared 
to  trust  her  voice  to  mention  it ;  and  the  inter- 
vening time  from  breakfast  to  dinner  Mrs.  Irvin 
spent  with  her,  in  endeavoring  to  read  and  recall 
some  of  those  antidotes  to  anxiety  which  they 
had  formerly  found  efficacious :  nor  were  they 
now  unsuccessful. 

At  dinner  they  met  their  friends  with  placid 
looks,  which  only  served  to  increase  the  chagrin 
of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley,  who  had  just  been  dis- 
appointed of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Arnold's  company  to 
dinner  ;  and  this  was  enough  to  discompose  them 
for  the  rest  of  the  day.  At  a  loss  for  amusement 
in  themselves,  they  had  ever  been  accustomed  to 
look  to  others  for  a  supply. 

"  What  shall  we  do  with  ourselves  all  the 
evening  ?"  said  Mrs.  Stanley  :  "  if  it  were  not  so 
warm  we  would  go  to  the  theatre  ;  and  yet  I  should 
not  like  to  make  my  appearance  there  till  I  had 
first  received  the  visits  of  my  acquaintance." 

"  Such  living  as  this  is  dreadful/'  interrupted 
Mr.  Stanley,  who  had  been  lounging  in  his  chair, 
inattentive  to  all  around  him.     "  I  beg  your  par- 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  Ill 

don,  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  but  I  cannot  think  how  you  have 
been  able  to  live  so  much  alone." 

"  I  never  could  have  spent  my  time  so  much  to 
my  satisfaction,"  answered  she,  "  without  this 
dear  girl,  and  books,  and  music  :  with  these,  the 
time  never  appeared  tedious." 

Ellen,  at  the  mention  of  music,  ventured  to 
speak  ;  observing  she  had  seen  an  instrument  in 
the  other  room.  "  I  hope  I  shall  be  able  to  amuse 
you  after  tea,  my  dear  father,"  added  she. 

"Oh!"  said  Mrs.  Stanley,  "  we  cannot  have 
music  all  the  day  long  :  besides,  one  performer  is 
scarcely  worth  hearing ;  you  must  learn  to  play 
in  concert,  and  then  perhaps  you  may  amuse  us 
for  half  an  hour." 

This  appeared  so  much  like  a  reproof  to  Ellen, 
that  she  remained  silent  and  hurt ;  but  Mrs.  Irvin, 
ever  wishing  to  divert  her  thoughts  from  this  sub- 
ject, mentioned  books  to  her  sister.  "  Don't  you 
find  them  an  agreeable  substitute  for  company  ?" 
asked  she. 

"  I  don't  know,"  answered  Mrs.  Stanley  ;  "  I 
think  they  are  all  alike  ;  and  then  it  is  so  much 
trouble  to  choose  which  I  should  like  :  and  when 
I  have  read,  I  find  so  little  amusement  from  it, 
that  I  seldom  take  a  book  in  my  hand.  But  the 
newspapers  are  interesting  enough  ;  I  sometimes 
read  them." 

"  Ah,  the  newspapers  !"  said  Mr.  Stanley,  start- 
ing up  and  ringing  the  bell  ;  "  I  never  thought  of 
them ;  I  ordered  one  to  be  brought  here  every 
day  :   I  wonder  if  there  are  any  in  the  house  V 

On  the  servant's  appearing,  he  was  answered, 
"  none   had    been    brought ;"    which    produced 


112  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

another  storm  in  his  countenance,  and  the  man 
was  despatched  to  procure  one  immediately. 

By  this  time  tea  was  ordered  in  another  room  ; 
after  which  Ellen  was  desired  to  try  the  instru- 
ment, as  it  was  a  new  one,  and  the  maker  had 
promised  to  change  it  if  not  approved  of. 

She  was  delighted  with  its  tones,  though  sorry 
to  observe  it  could  not  remove  the  gloom  of  her 
father  or  the  languor  of  her  mother,  who,  after 
the  contents  of  the  newspaper  had  been  discussed, 
were  again  at  a  loss  for  conversation.  Somewhat 
was  said  in  the  paper  of  the  contents  of  a  valua- 
ble library  to  be  sold ;  and  this  reminded  Mr. 
Stanley  of  having  one  of  his  rooms  fitted  up  in 
this  style. 

"  If  it  is  the  fashion,"  said  Mrs.  Stanley,  "  I 
suppose  we  must  have  one  :  though  I  heartily 
hope,  after  a  few  days,  when  our  friends  know 
of  our  being  in  town,  we  shall  be  so  much  en- 
gaged as  not  to  have  any  time  for  reading,  or  any- 
thing else  but  dressing  and  visiting." 

The  evening  passed  off  heavily,  and  the  whole 
party  retired  early,  determined,  if  possible,  not  to 
spend  another  day  in  this  manner. 

It  would  be  endless  to  recapitulate  all  the  vis- 
iters that,  in  the  course  of  the  week,  left  their 
cards  at  the  door  of  Mrs.  Stanley ;  or  of  all  the 
mantua-makers,  fancy-dressmakers,  and  milliners, 
that  were  employed  to  modernize  poor  Ellen,  and 
to  make  her  (in  dress,  at  least)  "  a  little  more 
like  other  people  ;" — this  was  Mrs.  Stanley's  kind 
expression,  when  she  introduced  these  fantastical 
fopperies  to  her  daughter's  notice,  and  who  was 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  113 

much  displeased  at  her  not  appearing  extremely 
delighted  at  being  made  the  object  of  their  atten- 
tion. 

"  Oh,  dear  ma'am,"  said  one,  "  Miss  Stanley 
requires  very  little  to  make  her  appearance  suit- 
able to  her  rank  !" 

"  1  think,"  says  another,  "  there  is  a  great  simi- 
larity between  Miss  Stanley  and  Lady  Anne  For- 
ester, who  is  just  coming  out  this  spring.  I  made 
such  a  charming  robe  for  her  ladyship  but  last 
week  !  If  you  like,  ma'am,  I  could,  with  a  few  al- 
terations, make  such  a  one  for  Miss  Stanley :  it 
was  very  becoming." 

Ellen  bore  very  little  part  in  these  consulta- 
tions ;  nor  could  she  appear  so  much  pleased  as 
she  wished  to  be,  when  she  thought  herself  obliged 
to  her  mother  for  thus  endeavoring  to  improve 
her  ;  though  she  could  not  help  thinking  the  mo- 
ney she  was  thus  expending  might  have  been 
better  bestowed. 

The  letters  that  Mrs.  Irvin  received  from  Mil- 
wood  seemed  to  indicate  that  her  presence  was 
wanted  there,  and  she  thought  she  could  perceive 
that  neither  Mr.  nor  Mrs.  Stanley  would  regret 
her  leaving  them ;  yet  the  imploring  looks  of 
Ellen,  whenever  her  departure  was  mentioned, 
had  hitherto  prevented  her  fixing  any  time  for  it ; 
till,  at  the  end  of  a  full  month,  she  declared  she 
must  name  the  day  for  her  return,  and  nothing  must 
prevent  it. 

Ellen  heard  her  determination  with  a  heavy 

countenance,  and  once  had  thoughts  of  asking  to 

go  with  her  ;  but  the  recollection  of  all  her  aunt 

had  said  of  her  duty  to  her  parents  checked  these 

10s* 


114  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

suggestions  ;  and  throwing  her  arms  round  the 
neck  of  this  dear  and  valued  friend,  she  promised 
not  to  repine.  "  But  you  will  write  to  me  ?"  said 
she  ;  "  promise  me  again  and  again,  my  dear 
aunt,  and  if  you  should  be  ill,  or  at  any  time  want 
my  assistance,  in  what  I  know  to  be  of  far  more 
consequence  than  the  vain  pursuits  I  must  shortly 
follow,  do  not  deny  me  the  pleasure  of  again  liv- 
ing with  you  at  Milwood." 

Mrs.  Irvin  returned  an  affectionate  answer ; 
and  after  having  received  from  Ellen  a  promise 
of  writing  to  her  every  thought  of  her  heart,  and 
from  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  many  unmeaning 
speeches  of  the  pleasure  her  company  had  afford- 
ed them,  and  regret  at  her  departure,  she  got  into 
a  post-chaise  without  trusting  herself  to  take  a 
particular  farewell  of  her  niece,  who  silently  at- 
tended her  with  her  father  to  the  door  ;  and  when, 
for  the  last  time,  she  looked  at  her  aunt,  the  eyes 
of  each  Avere  filled  with  tears,  as  Mrs.  Irvin  fondly 
repeated,  "  God  bless  you,  my  dear,  dear  Ellen  !" 

As  soon  as  the  chaise  drove  from  the  door,  the 
sorrowing  girl  flew  to  her  own  room,  where,  with- 
out perceiving  the  maid  whom  her  mother  had  a 
few  days  before  hired  to  attend  upon  her,  she 
threw  herself  into  a  chair,  and  burst  into  tears. 
The  young  woman  appeared  astonished,  and,  with 
great  civility,  asked  if  she  was  unwell,  or  if  she 
could  bring  her  anything  ? 

"  Oh  no,"  said  Ellen,  still  weeping ;  "  I  have 
lost  my  best  friend  !  my  aunt  has  gone  !  But  do 
not  tell  mamma  how  sorry  I  am  :  and  yet,"  added 
she,  hesitating,  "  there  is  nothing  wrong  in  it ; 
and  if  there  was,  she  would  not  be  displeased." 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  115 

"Dear  me,  no,  Miss,"  said  the  maid  ;  "  your 
mamma.  I  am  sure,  cannot  be  angry  :  it  is  very 
natural  to  cry  when  we  part  from  friends  ;  and  I 
dare  say  the  lady  that  is  just  gone  is  more  natu- 
ral to  you  than  your  own  mother  ;  for  I  think  1 
have  heard  that  you  have  lived  with  her  ever 
since  you  were  born,  and  never  saw  your  mam- 
ma till  now." 

Ellen  began  to  recollect  herself,  and  fearing  to 
speak  much  on  this  subject,  and  to  a  servants, 
likewise,  slightly  answered,  "  It  was  true,  she 
had  left  her  parents  so  early  that  they  were  al- 
most strangers  to  her  when  they  met ;  and  hav- 
ing lived  with  her  aunt  for  so  many  years,  she 
could  not  help  feeling  a  great  deal  at  her  depar- 
ture :"  and  thanking  her  for  her  attention,  she 
dried  her  eyes,  and  went  to  seek  her  mother. 
She  found  her  very  busily  engaged  with  her  own 
maid  in  looking  for  a  convenient  place  to  depos- 
ite  more  hats  and  caps  which  were  just  brought 
from  the  milliner's  ;  and  seeing  Ellen,  she  told 
her  she  intended  taking  her  that  evening  to 
one  of  the  public  gardens,  and  desired  her  there- 
fore to  consult  her  servant  (who,  she  had  been 
assured,  possessed  great  taste  in  dress)  on  what 
she  would  wear.  "  Now  your  aunt  is  gone,"  con- 
tinued she,  "  1  suppose  you  will  want  something 
to  console  you  for  her  loss  ;  and  there  you  will 
hear  some  beautiful  music,  and  see  some  fine 
fireworks  :  are  not  you  pleased  with  the  thought 
of  it  ?"  said  she  rather  hastily,  observing  that  El- 
len still  looked  melancholy. 

"  Yes,  mamma,"  replied  the  frighted  girl,  "  I 


116  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

shall  like  it  very  much  :  but  shall  we  not  see  a 
great  deal  of  company  ?" 

"  To  be  sure  we  shall,"  replied  Mrs.  Stanley, 
"  or  I  assure  you  I  would  not  go.  But  you  need 
not  be  alarmed  ;  I  can  venture  to  say  no  one  will 
speak  or  look  at  you  :  go  along,  child,  and  con- 
sider what  you  shall  wear." 

Ellen  heartily  hoped  her  mother's  prediction 
would  prove  true  ;  and  returning  to  her  own  room, 
which  she  now  found  empty,  she  was  willing  to 
indulge  herself  with  a  little  reading  :  and  there- 
fore determined  to  delay  the  important  consulta- 
tion till  nearer  dinner. 

When  she  had  composed  her  mind  with  a  fa- 
vorite author,  she  rang  the  bell,  and  on  her  ser- 
vant's attending,  she  told  her  what  her  mother  had 
desired  ;  and  as  Ellen  was  not  very  particular  as 
to  what  she  should  wear,  so  that  it  was  not  what 
she  called  "  very  fine  indeed,"  her  choice  was 
soon  made,  and  she  went  to  the  dining-room  with 
a  determination  to  be  pleased  with  her  mother's 
proposal,  and  to  anticipate  only  pleasure  from  the 
evening's  entertainment. 

Mr.  Stanley  dined  out  that  day  ;  but  they  were 
to  go  in  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Arnold's  party,  and  several 
gentlemen  with  them. 

As  Mrs.  Stanley  had  not  yet  given  up  the  idea 
of  being  admired,  she  was  not  displeased  at  hear- 
ing Ellen  had  chosen  a  dress  which  gave  her 
more  the  appearance  of  a  child  than  she  really 
was. 

It  was  late  in  the  evening  before  the  carriage 
was  ordered  ;  and  Ellen  followed  her  mother  into 
it,  with  a  disposition  half  afraid  and  half  pleased  j 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  117 

and  as  they  drove  to  the  entrance  of  the  gardens, 
she  could  not  tell  what  were  her  expectations.  She 
thought  of  her  aunt's  arrival  at  Milwood,  which 
she  supposed  was  about  this  time  ;  but  soon  the 
carriage  stopped,  and  she  was  awakened  from  her 
revery,  when  she  saw  Mr.  Arnold  at  the  door  of 
it,  ready  to  hand  her  out. — Her  mind  was  all  con- 
fusion, and  she  was  hurried  along  without  know- 
ing where  she  was,  or  whom  she  followed. 

They  soon  reached  their  party,  and  immediate- 
ly the  Miss  Arnolds  seized  her  arm,  and  began  in- 
quiring if  she  was  not  delighted.  A  box  had  been 
procured  for  them  near  the  orchestra  ;  and  when 
the  music  began,  Ellen  wished  for  no  other  amuse- 
ment. 

Her  young  companions,  who  were  much  more 
gayly  dressed  than  herself,  when  they  had  heard 
all  her  observations  on  the  illumination  and  orna- 
ments of  the  place,  were  very  willing  to  resign 
her  whole  attention  to  the  band,  while  theirs  was 
more  agreeably  engrossed  by  the  conversation  of 
the  gentleman  who  attended  them  ;  and  they  si- 
lently exulted  over  Ellen,  that  they  received  more 
attention  than  herself ;  while  she  felt  contented 
to  remain  unnoticed,  if,  without  interruption,  she 
might  attend  to  what  she  thought  much  better 
worth  hearing. 

Mrs.  Stanley  paid  little  attention  to  her  daugh- 
ter ;  for,  like  the  Miss  Arnolds,  she,  too,  was  en- 
gaged in  conversation  with  a  gentleman  :  and  she 
began  to  think,  if  this  was  going  into  public,  she 
should  not  so  much  mind  it :  "I  can  sit  very 
quietly  here,"  thought  she,  "  and  be  very  agree- 
ably entertained  ;  and  it  is  amusing  enough  to  see 


118  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

the  company  walking  about ;  nay,  I  don't  think 
my  aunt  would  dislike  this  ; — I  wish  she  was 
here  !" 

But  it  was  not  long  the  rest  of  the  party  were 
inclined  to  sit ;  and  Mrs.  Arnold  proposed  walk- 
ing through  the  gardens.  "  Besides,  the  fireworks 
are  soon  to  begin,"  said  she  ;  "  and  we  shall  not 
get  a  good  situation  to  see  them." 

This  was  not  what  Ellen  wished  ;  but  she  stood 
up  with  the  others,  and  when  no  one  offered  her  an 
arm,  she  remained  distressed  and  confused.  She 
looked  first  at  her  mother, — but  her  eye  was  nev- 
er cast  on  her  ;  then  at  the  Miss  Arnolds, — but 
they  were  laughing  very  loud  at  something  their 
companion  had  said  ;  and  had  not  their  father, 
with  some  good  nature  toward  Ellen,  reminded 
them  of  her,  she  would  have  been  totally  disre- 
garded. 

The  youngest  now  addressed  some  conversa- 
tion to  her,  and  putting  her  arm  within  hers,  they 
followed  the  company  through  some  very  pretty 
walks,  with  which  Ellen  expressed  herself  much 
pleased. 

Mr.  Arnold  joined  his  daughter  and  Ellen, 
and  conducted  them  to  the  spot  whence  they 
were  to  see  the  fireworks  ;  with  which  Ellen 
was  equally  astonished  and  pleased  ;  and  on  the 
whole  the  evening  was  more  agreeable  than  she 
expected. 

As  she  returned  home  with  her  mother,  she 
thanked  her  for  the  entertainment  she  had  re- 
ceived ;  but  the  lateness  of  the  hour,  and  the  con- 
fusion of  the  company  she  had  been  in,  were 
so  new  to  her,  that  she  felt  quite  fatigued,  and 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  119 

retired  to  her  own  apartment  as  soon  as  they 
alighted. 

There  her  maid  attended  to  undress  her ;  but 
Ellen,  unable  to  answer  all  her  inquiries,  of  how 
she  had  been  entertained,  and  what  she  had  seen, 
soon  dismissed  her ;  and  having  recommended 
herself  to  the  Almighty,  she  got  into  bed ;  but 
the  hurry  and  bustle  she  had  been  so  unaccus- 
tomed to,  prevented  her  sleeping  for  many  hours 
after  she  was  there.  This  made  her  later  in  the 
morning  ;  and  she  found  reason  to  regret  the  last 
night's  pleasure,  as  it  prevented  her  pursuing  her 
usual  plan  of  reading  and  writing  before  the  break- 
fast-hour. 

She  now  received  lessons  of  music  and  dan- 
cing from  the  most  eminent  masters  ;  and  Mr. 
Stanley  seemed  interested  in  her  improvement  in 
these  accomplishments.  In  the  former,  her  native 
taste  soon  made  her  excel  ;  and  as  she  found  her 
father  pleased  with  her  attention  to  it,  she  en- 
deavored to  gain  more  courage  as  a  performer, 
and  it  was  not  long  before  she  conquered  the  dif- 
fidence she  at  first  felt  when  she  attempted  to 
sing  and  play  before  any  company. 

The  summer  was  now  far  advanced ;  and  as 
most  of  the  fashionable  world  were  leaving  the 
town  for  a  few  weeks,  Mrs.  Stanley  also  wished 
to  visit  the  country  for  that  time. 

Ellen  thought  of  Mil  wood  ;  but  her  hopes  were 
soon  checked  by  the  mention  of  Brighton,  or 
Tunbridge  Wells,  or  some  other  place  of  gay  re- 
sort :  the  latter  was  fixed  on,  a  house  taken,  and 
the  whole  family  removed  there  for  a  month  or 
six  weeks. 


120  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

Here  Ellen  had  the  unexpected  pleasure  of 
meeting  with  her  good  friend  Mr.  Herbert,  whose 
health  obliged  him  to  leave  the  duties  of  his  par- 
ish for  a  short  time  ;  and  in  his  society,  and  read- 
ing the  excellent  and  affectionate  letters  she  often 
received  from  her  aunt,  she  found  more  pleasure 
than  in  all  the  gay  assemblies  which  she  attend- 
ed with  her  mother. 

The  unaffected  simplicity  of  her  manners  gain- 
ed her  notice  and  admiration,  which,  in  those 
who  could  engage  her  in  any  conversation  be- 
yond the  trifling  pursuits  of  the  day,  was  gene- 
rally increased  to  esteem.  This,  with  the  splen- 
did appearance  of  her  father's  equipage,  made  her 
acquaintance  more  and  more  sought  for  ;  but  hap- 
pily for  Ellen,  the  excellent  instructions  she  had 
received  were  too  deeply  engraven  on  her  mind, 
to  suffer  the  compliments  that  were  so  often  paid 
her  to  make  any  lasting  impression  ;  and  though, 
for  a  time,  she  seemed  pleased  with  what  she 
heard,  the  satisfaction  was  but  transient ;  and 
when  retired  within  herself,  "  the  world  shut  out," 
she  would  blush  at  the  recollection  of  the  unmean- 
ing discourse  she  had  listened  to. 

These  were  not  her  feelings  while  at  Milwood, 
nor  at  Tunbridge,  when  she  could  gain  permis- 
sion to  walk  out  with  Mr.  Herbert,  who  often 
called  on  her  for  that  purpose  ;  and  then,  as  it 
was  his  invariable  custom  to  search  for  objects 
of  charity  and  compassion,  on  whom  he  could  be- 
stow, at  least,  the  comfort  of  commiseration,  and 
oftentimes  relieve  the  wounded  mind,  bending  un- 
der the  weight  of  misery,  which  mortal  nature, 
unsupported  by  religion,  would  too  probably  sink 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  121 

under,  Ellen's  heart  rejoiced  in  the  opportunity 
of  relieving  their  temporal  wants,  as  her  father's 
liberality  had  put  it  in  her  power. 

There  was  also  a  very  agreeable  family,  with 
whom  Mr.  Herbert  became  acquainted,  and  whom 
the  ill  health  of  one  of  the  daughters  had  brought 
to  this  place. 

In  her  walks  with  this  good  man,  Ellen  had 
often  met  and  joined  them  ;  though,  in  the  places 
of  public  resort,  she  had  seen  none  of  the  family 
except  the  young  men,  who  there  bowed  to  her 
at  a  distance,  but,  discouraged  by  the  supercilious 
looks  of  Mrs.  Stanley,  had  not  ventured  to  address 
her  as  an  acquaintance.  With  every  part  of  this 
family  Ellen  was  much  pleased,  and  she  was  glad 
to  hear  they  intended  buying  a  house  in  the  neigh- 
borhood of  Milwood. 

The  round  of  company,  and  the  late  hours  El- 
len was  now  obliged  to  conform  to,  soon  deprived 
her  of  that  look  of  health  for  which  she  had  for- 
merly been  both  admired  and  envied  ;  she  became 
pale  and  dejected,  and  looked,  like  all  other  fash- 
ionable ladies,  when  not  supplied  by  the  roses  of 
art,  quite  worn  out  in  the  pursuit  of  pleasure  ;  but 
her  mother  appeared  more  attached  to  her,  and 
her  father  was  delighted  to  observe  the  admira- 
tion she  generally  attracted. 

It  was  one  evening,  when  she  felt  herself  more 
than  usually  unwell,  that  she  begged  to  be  excus- 
ed from  attending  the  theatre  ;  and  though  her 
mother  feared  the  being  so  long  alone  would  hurt 
her  spirits,  after  many  entreaties  and  assurances  to 
the  contrary,  she  complied,  and  Ellen  was  left  to 
enjoy  the  evening  as  she  liked.  She  only  feared 
11 


122  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

it  would  be  too  short :  and  on  Mrs.  Stanley's  re- 
turn, she  was  so  far  from  finding  her  complaining 
of  the  tediousness  of  the  time,  that  she  appeared 
surprised  to  see  her  so  soon.  For  one  moment, 
Mrs.  Stanley  wished  to  obtain  this  valuable  knowl- 
edge of  thus  spending  a  few  hours  quite  to  her- 
self, without  being  entirely  devoured  by  the 
spleen  ;  but  she  recollected  her  health  and  for- 
tune were  both  such  as  would  allow  her  to  partake 
of  every  public  amusement,  and  she  need  not 
study  for  solitary  ones,  since  she  was  determined 
never  to  be  alone ;  yet  she  congratulated  her 
daughter  on  being  so  well  able  to  amuse  herself 
when  deprived  of  every  other  resource. — "  But 
why  had  you  not  sent  for  a  novel  ?"  said  she,  on 
taking  up  one  of  the  books  Ellen  had  chosen  for 
the  evening,  and  which  was  on  a  serious  subject ; 
"  would  it  not  have  been  a  better  companion  than 
this  ?" 

Ellen  answered,  with  great  good-humor,  "  Not 
in  my  opinion,  my  dear  mother  ;  since  this  book 
speaks  truth,  which  novels  never  do." 

Mrs.  Stanley  remarked,  "  she  had  some  very 
odd  notions  ;"  and  then  proceeded  to  give  her  an 
account  of  the  play,  and  the  company  she  had 
seen  ;  all  of  which  Ellen  endeavored  to  appear 
interested  in. 

The  next  morning  she  went  with  her  mother 
to  one  of  the  public  libraries,  where,  at  her  desire, 
she  had  before  put  her  name,  with  that  of  Mrs. 
Stanley,  to  a  raffle.  Two  or  three  gentlemen 
were  reading  the  list  of  the  names  of  the  sub- 
scribers ;  and  theirs  were  repeated  among  the 
rest. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  123 

"  Who  are  trie  Stanle)'s  ?"  said  one  of  these 
fashionable  loungers,  who  either  did  not  know 
they  were  in  the  shop,  or  pretended  to  be  igno- 
rant of  it. 

Another  answered,  they  were  "  Rich  Nabobs 
just  come  from  the  East." 

"  They  have  one  daughter,"  added  another ; 
(Ellen  felt  her  curiosity  excited,  and  her  color 
rise,  as  they  continued  ;)  "  but  I  hear  she  is  noth- 
ing at  all,  neither  handsome  nor  accomplished, 
but  very  awkward." 

"  Sure,"  thought  Ellen,  "  I  ought  not  to  be 
mortified  at  this  ;  I  dare  say  it  is  the  truth,  though 
I  have  lately  heard  so  much  to  the  contrary." 

Her  reflections  were  interrupted  by  her  mo- 
ther's taking  her  arm,  and  walking  out  of  the 
shop.  As  she  had  been  speaking  to  one  of  the 
persons  in  it,  she  had  not  heard  what  had  given 
Ellen  this  uneasiness,  and  therefore  wondered  at 
her  silence. 

As  they  passed  the  window,  attended  by  their 
footman,  one  of  the  gentlemen  exclaimed,  "  Ah, 
that's  the  Stanley  livery  !"  and  a  loud  laugh  en- 
sued, which  still  rung  in  Ellen's  ears  when  far 
away  from  the  place  in  which  she  had  heard  it. 

"  What  is  the  matter  with  you,  child  ?"  said 
Mrs.  Stanley  ;  "  you  seem  quite  stupid."  Ellen 
knew  not  whether  she  should  tell  her  mother  the 
mortification  she  had  received,  or  not ;  when  they 
were  joined  by  another  party,  and  she  lost  the 
opportunity  ;  and  as  no  conversation  was  partic- 
ularly addressed  to  her,  she  continued  to  rumi- 
nate on  it,  till  she  was  angry  with  herself  at  feel- 
ing it  as  such. 


124  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

"  Have  I  not  acknowledged  it  to  be  truth  ?" 
said  she  ;  "  and  why  should  I  be  so  displeased  at 
it  ?  Unknown  to  myself  I  have  contracted  a  love 
of  admiration  ;  I  already  begin  to  look  for  praise, 
and  to  be  hurt  if  I  don't  receive  it :"  and  at  night 
she  took  herself  severely  to  task  for  allowing  it  to 
have  this  effect.  She  saw,  from  this  incident,  the 
necessity  of  increased  watchfulness  over  her  own 
heart,  and  determined  to  use  a  greater  strictness 
and  attention  to  things  of  more  consequence  than 
either  her  accomplishments  or  appearance. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  125 


CHAPTER  IX. 

"  Retain  the  sweet  simplicity  of  youth  : 
And  all  thy  virtue  dictates,  dare  to  do." 

On  their  return  to  town,  Mr.  Stanley  entered 
into  a  society  of  gentlemen,  to  whom  he  had  been 
introduced  at  Timbridge,  who  were  amateurs  in 
music,  and  he  became  one  likewise — or,  at  least, 
so  he  fancied  himself ;  for  though  a  very  indiffer- 
ent performer  on  whatever  instrument  he  attempt- 
ed, he  now  expressed  quite  an  enthusiastic  fond- 
ness for  it.  His  house  was  filled  with  instru- 
ments of  every  kind,  and  both  private  and  public 
performers  frequented  it. 

Ellen's  natural  love  of  music  made  her  enter 
into  all  her  father's  proposals  of  this  sort ;  and 
she  was  soon  one  of  the  first  performers  on  the 
harp  and  piano  at  all  their  private  concerts. 

Several  ladies,  as  well  as  herself,  attended,  and 
assisted  at  these  entertainments  ;  but  for  a  long 
time  Ellen  bore  the  belle,  as  possessing  most  taste 
and  the  finest  voice. 

Mr.  Stanley  was  delighted  to  hear  her  praises  ; 
and,  in  return,  he  more  readily  agreed  to  her  de- 
sire of  relieving  the  poor,  when  she  now  and  then 
ventured  to  mention  to  him  some  of  those  objects 
which,  through  the  intervention  of  her  maid,  were 
made  known  to  her. 

It  was  now  very  much  the  fashion  to  make  mu- 
ll* 


126  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

sical  parties  on  Sunday  evening  ;  and  it  was  a 
source  of  uneasiness  to  Ellen,  lest  she  should  be 
obliged  to  attend  them.  Her  inclination  never  led 
her  that  way  ;  and  her  parents,  on  account  of  not 
thinking  her  quite  well,  would  allow  her  to  do  as 
she  pleased  ;  though  they  rather  chose  to  attrib- 
ute her  refusal  to  the  above  cause,  than  to  the 
serious  hints  she  would  sometimes  give  of  the 
impropriety  of  such  entertainments  on  so  sacred 
a  day. 

It  was  but  once  that  she  was  called  upon  to 
give  a  decided  preference  of  duty  toward  God, 
rather  than  her  parents,  on  such  an  occasion. — 
Mr.  Stanley  had  made  a  party  at  home  on  that 
day  ;  and  Ellen  (considering  that  if  she  once,  with 
a  wish  of  obliging  him,  so  far  complied  with  his 
desire  as  to  be  one  of  the  performers,  it  would  be 
leading  to  the  same  again,  from  which,  after  once 
engaging  in  it,  it  would  be  more  difficult  to  re- 
cede) summoned  all  her  resolution,  and  positively 
refused  to  join  the  party.  Her  request  to  be  ex- 
cused, produced  for  some  time  a  violent  alterca- 
tion with  both  her  parents.  "  What  can  we  say 
for  you  ?"  said  Mrs.  Stanley  ;  "  you  are  not  ill  to- 
day ;  you  went  to  church  in  the  morning  ;  and  if 
you  are  well  enough  for  that,  you  are  able  to  spend 
the  evening  in  company." 

"  No,"  said  Ellen,  "  I  am  not  ill ;  but  my  hav- 
ing been  to  church,  my  dear  mother,  is  one  reason 
why  I  cannot  join  the  party  in  the  evening." 

"  What  notions  are  these !"  exclaimed  Mrs. 
Stanley  ;  "  indeed  you  make  me  quite  angry  ; 
what  harm  do  you  think  will  happen  to  you  from 
hearing  a  little  music  on  a  Sunday  evening  ?" 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  127 

"  It  is  more  than  a  little,  dear  mamma,"  replied 
Ellen,  "  and  seeing  a  great  deal  of  company  ;  but 
I  wish  not  to  dispute  with  you  :  I  cannot,  indeed 
I  cannot,  enter  into  it.  Consider  how  I  have 
been  educated ;  and  my  own  judgment,  as  well 
as  the  opinion  of  those  to  whose  care  you  intrust- 
ed me  in  my  childhood,  are  against  it ;  but  above 
all,"  added  she,  with  uncommon  seriousness,  "  the 
commands  of  God  absolutely  forbid  it." 

Mrs.  Stanley  was  extremely  angry,  and  left  the 
room,  saying  she  was  "  very  impertinent,  and 
only  pretended  to  more  goodness  than  anybody 
else." 

When  they  met  at  dinner,  Ellen  had  to  encoun- 
ter the  angry  looks  of  her  mother,  and  the  severe 
displeasure  of  Mr.  Stanley,  who  had  been  inform- 
ed of  Ellen's  whimsical  dislike  of  joining  the  par- 
ty in  the  evening,  "  because  she  thought  it  very 
wicked."  This  was  Mrs.  Stanley's  way  of  ex- 
pressing her  daughter's  just  and  proper  refusal  ; 
and  again  she  had  the  difficult  task  of  assigning  the 
cause  of  it.  Her  reasons  for  so  doing  were  more 
offensive  to  her  parents  than  her  refusal ;  as, 
though  they  liked  not  to  acknowledge  it  even  to 
themselves,  something  within  told  them  Ellen 
might  be  right ;  and  if  she  was  so,  her  steadiness 
in  adhering  to  it  must  be  commendable. 

They  each  commanded  her  to  go  to  her  own 
apartment,  and  agreed  to  attribute  her  absence 
from  the  company  to  a  violent  headache. 

Ellen  passed  the  evening  quite  alone  ;  not  so 
comfortably  as  she  would  have  done  had  not  this 
affair  happened,  but  still  with  such  a  conscious- 
ness of  having  acted  right,  that   she  felt,  were  it 


128  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

to  do  over  again,  she  would  not  alter  her  con- 
duct. 

The  next  morning  she  was  all  attention  to  her 
parents  ;  nothing  was  said  of  the  past  evening, 
till  Mr.  Stanley  produced  some  new  music  he  had 
bespoke  the  week  before,  and  which  was  just 
brought  home.  Ellen  expressed  herself  with 
great  sincerity  extremely  obliged  to  him,  and 
promised  to  use  great  diligence  in  practising  and 
learning  it  perfectly. 

"  Will  you  ?"  said  Mr.  Stanley,  whose  good- 
nature soon  made  him  forget  the  violent  heat  his 
uncontrolled  passions  often  put  him  in  :  "  there's 
a  good  girl ;  we'll  have  it  the  next  musical  party, 
and  it  sha'nt  be  on  a  Sunday." 

"  Thank  you,  my  dear  father,"  answered  Ellen, 
whose  heart  quite  melted  at  this  condescension  : 
"  I  assure  you,  you  shall  not  have  to  complain  of 
my  want  of  attention  to  any  wish  of  yours — that 
is  not  inconsistent  with  a  still  greater  duty,"  ad- 
ded she,  with  hesitation  ;  and  she  turned  to  her 
mother  to  exhibit  the  music  books  with  increased 
pleasure.  "  Was  it  not  good  of  my  father,  madam," 
said  she,  "  to  order  them  as  soon  as  they  were 
published,  and  without  saying  anything  to  me  ?" 

"  I  don't  know,"  answered  Mrs.  Stanley,  not 
quite  pleased  with  this  early  reconciliation  ;  "  I 
think  your  father  and  you  are  music-mad.  I  had 
rather  play  at  cards  at  any  time  ;  though  last 
night  it  was  very  well,  as  I  find  card-playing  is 
forbidden  on  a  Sunday,  and  I  don't  wish  to  do 
anything  improper  any  more  than  yourself." 

Ellen  saw  the  temper  of  her  mother,  and  made 
no  answer  ;  and  the   newspaper,  which  was  al- 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS  129 

ways  part  of  the  breakfast  equipage,  supplied  the 
deficiency  of  farther  conversation. 

Among  all  her  young  acquaintance,  which  was 
very  large,  Ellen  found  none  particularly  suited 
to  her,  or  that  could  in  any  degree  supply  the 
place  of  her  beloved  sister.  In  her  most  serious 
moments,  the  recollection  of  the  happiness  to 
which  she  fondly  hoped  her  lamented  Anna  was 
removed,  and  the  affection  she  still  retained  for 
her  memory,  would  make  her  more  earnest  in  her 
prayers  to  be  kept  from  the  snares  of  the  world, 
so  as  not  to  forfeit  her  hopes  of  hereafter  partak- 
ing it  with  her.  All  the  good  resolutions  she  had 
formed  when  mourning  for  her  death  returned  with 
double  force  ;  and  when,  through  the  various  en- 
gagements she  was  obliged  to  enter  into,  she 
found  her  affections  weaned  from  Heaven  and 
heavenly  things,  she  would  bless  God  for  thus 
recalling  them  to  her  mind,  and  pray  for  increase 
of  grace  to  pursue  them. 

In  compliance  with  her  father's  wishes,  more 
of  her  time  was  spent  at  the  piano  than  she  thought 
quite  right,  and,  by  her  earnest  applications,  she 
was  soon  mistress  of  the  new  music  he  had  pre- 
sented her  with  ;  and  as  Mr.  Stanley  was  desir- 
ous that  others  also  should  witness  her  perfection 
in  it,  a  musical  party  was  invited,  in  which  Ellen 
was  the  chief  performer,  and  met  with  the  great- 
est applause.  Her  heart  was  scarcely  proof 
against  this,  especially  when  she  saw  both  her 
father  and  mother  delighted  with  the  encomiums 
bestowed  on  her  ;  and  she  experienced  the  truth 
of  an  observation  made  by  the  wisest  of  men,  that 
"  it  is  more  difficult  to  bear  praise  than  censure." 


130  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

She  heard  of  nothing  through  the  room,  or  even 
when  she  had  left  it,  but  the  excellence  of  her 
performance  ;  for  her  maid  had  heard  enough  from 
the  servants  below  (who  are  generally  retailers 
of  their  masters'  opinion),  to  be  ready  also  to  offer 
her  compliments  on  this  great  occasion  ;  and  Ellen 
was  conscious  that  she  took  too  much  pleasure  in 
hearing  them. 

The  next  morning,  her  senses  were  a  little  re- 
turned ;  but  still  she  felt  more  pleasure  in  touch-, 
ing  the  instrument  again,  and  recollecting  the 
praises  she  had  received,  than  in  anything  else. 
No  book  pleased  her  like  her  music-book  :  but  it 
was  not  long  she  could  remain  so  unlike  herself: 
and  a  letter  from  her  aunt  soon  recalled  her 
thoughts  to  their  usual  turn. 

It  was  thus  poor  Ellen  felt  the  evils  of  a  situa- 
tion in  which  many  of  my  young  readers  might 
possibly  suppose  no  evil  could  arise  ;  but  as  she 
advanced  in  life,  she  more  evidently  saw  the  pride, 
envy,  and  detraction  which  a  love  of  pleasure  and 
admiration  insensibly  leads  to. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  131 


CHAPTER  X. 


u  Pleasure  is  deaf,  when  told  of  future  pain  ; 
And  sounds  prophetic  are  too  rough  to  suit 
Ears  long  accustomed  to  the  pleasing  lute." 

COWPER. 


Mr  Stanley's  whole  attention  was  now  be- 
come so  engrossed  with  music,  that  he  was  sel- 
dom engaged  in  any  other  way :  and  his  wife 
found  cards  and  dress  equally  attractive  ;  they  be- 
came quite  a  fashionable  couple,  were  hardly  ever 
seen  together,  and  never  in  public  at  the  same 
place.  While  her  mornings  were  fully  occupied 
in  fancying  ornaments  for  the  evening,  his  were 
employed  in  looking  over  music,  listening  to  the 
opinion  of  those  he  thought  the  best  judges  of 
whatever  came  out  new,  and  taking  every  oppor- 
tunity of  making  himself  known  as  a  patron  of  all 
who  wished  to  bring  forward  any  new  piece,  or 
to  raise  their  characters  as  public  performers. 

Ellen,  though  she  was  sensible  that  neither  her 
father's  nor  mother's  pursuit  could,  in  the  end, 
produce  the  happiness  they  wished,  yet  felt  una- 
ble to  prevent  it,  and  therefore  continued  to  walk 
the  same  round,  endeavoring  to  please  both  ;  and 
when  she  found  herself  gradually  rising  in  the 
affections  of  her  father,  she  would  indulge  a  hope 
that  she  might  hereafter  lead  him  to  a  higher  aim  : 
but  of  her  mother  she  could  form  no  such  pleas- 


132  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

ing  expectations  ;  the  continual  round  of  company- 
she  was  in,  and  her  increased  fondness  for  all- 
prevailing  cards,  with  which,  when  Time  is 
decked, 


"  He  charms  a  world  whom  fashion  blinds 
To  his  true  worth,  most  pleased  when  idle  most : 
Whose  only  happy,  are  their  wasted  hours." 

CoWPER. 


—gave  Ellen  scarcely  an  opportunity  of  seeing  her, 
much  less  of  conversing  with  her  on  any  subject, 
but  in  their  different  engagements  :  for  as  Ellen's 
skill  in  music  qualified  her  both  to  give  and  re- 
ceive amusement  in  her  father's  parties,  she  more 
frequently  went  out  with  him  than  with  her  mo- 
ther. 

This  amiable  girl  had  now  been  nearly  two 
years  without  seeing  her  beloved  aunt,  whose 
heart  yearned  to  behold  her  ;  and  in  every  letter, 
though  she  forbore  to  express  how  very  earnestly 
she  desired  it,  there  was  an  inquiry,  if  she  thought 
her  parents  could  spare  her,  at  least  for  a  few 
weeks.  Ellen  was  as  eager  for  their  permission 
as  her  aunt ;  and  with  an  anxious  bosom  she 
waited  their  reply. — Her  mother  said  she  had  no 
objection ;  but  Mr.  Stanley  remarked  that  the 
Oratorios  would  soon  commence,  and  that  he  had 
procured  tickets  for  her.' — "  Surely,"  said  he, 
"you  will  not  leave  town  at  such  a  time  !" 

Thus  challenged,  Ellen  knew  not  what  to  an- 
swer ;  not  that  the  considerations  her  father  had 
mentioned  were  of  sufficient  weight  to  prevent 
her  feeling  a  little  disappointed.  Her  rapid  im- 
agination had  already  conducted  her  to  Mil  wood  ; 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  133 

yet,  as  she  was  sensible  her  aunt  would  not  re- 
joice in  seeing  her  if  it  was  not  with  the  entire 
approbation  of  those  she  left,  she  called  up  all  her 
resolution,  and  with  great  good-humor  answered, 
"  She  was  much  obliged  to  her  father,  and  as  he 
was  so  kind  as  to  wish  it,  she  would  defer  her 
visit  till  the  Oratorios  were  ended." 

She  did  not  then  ask  when  that  would  be  ;  but 
the  next  time  she  had  the  newspapers  in  her  hand, 
she  carefully  examined  if  anything  was  there  said 
of  them,  and  found  they  were  to  continue  during 
the  next  month. 

Their  daughter's  so  readily  deferring  the  long- 
wished-for  pleasure  of  seeing  her  aunt  was  grati- 
fying both  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  ;  and  the  lat- 
ter began  to  think  that  now  she  was  a  little  wean- 
ed from  her  "  old-fashioned  opinions,"  she  might 
become  a  little  more  worthy  of  her  affections  : 
but,  alas  !  poor  woman,  her  love  was  all  centred 
in  herself;  and  as  at  present  she  found  no  void  in 
her  amusements,  nor  any  difficulty  to  be  overcome, 
her  attention  toward  Ellen  soon  wore  off,  and  her 
favorite  pursuit  was  alone  the  subject  of  her 
thoughts. 

In  Mrs.  Irvin's  answer  to  the  letter  Ellen  had 
written  to  inform  her  of  the  delay  of  her  journey 
to  her,  she  congratulated  her  on  the  pleasure  it 
appeared  to  give  her  father,  and  commended  her 
for  thus  complying  with  his  wishes. — "  We  must 
often  do  this,  my  dear  Ellen,"  continued  she  ; 
"  and  instead  of  being  hurt  at  our  disappointment, 
or  proud  of  our  self-denial,  we  should  be  thankful 
that  such  an  opportunity  is  afforded  us  of  showing 
whether  we  have  really  learned  that  great  lesson 


134  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

or  not."  She  likewise  mentioned  the  family 
which  Ellen  had  seen  with  Mr.  Herbert  at  Tun- 
bridge,  and  which  were  now  quite  settled  in  their 
neighborhood,  as  not  only  an  agreeable  addition 
to  their  society,  but  a  blessing  to  the  poor  of  Mil- 
wood. 

The  recollection  of  this  pleasant  and  worthy 
family  made  Ellen  still  more  anxious  for  the  time's 
arriving  when  she  should  be  farther  introduced 
to  them  ;  but  she  was  soon  to  learn  that  every 
pleasure  in  this  life  is  uncertain,  and  called  to  a 
greater  trial  of  her  faith  and  submission  to  the 
will  of  God  than  she  had  ever  yet  experienced. — 
This  was  no  other  than  the  sudden  death  of  her 
mother  :  for,  to  those  so  unprepared  to  leave  this 
world  as  was  Mrs.  Stanley,  death,  however  ex- 
pected by  others,  must  to  themselves  be  always 
so. 

The  life  of  dissipation  which  this  unthinking 
woman  so  freely  entered  into,  soon  led  her  to  the 
grave  ;  but  while  she  was  able  to  get  out,  no  per- 
suasion could  induce  her  to  restrain  her  love  of 
pleasure  ;  and,  though  her  pale  and  lifeless  looks 
at  first  alarmed  Ellen,  yet  as,  each  evening,  she 
saw  her  full  of  spirits,  highly  rouged,  and  gayly 
dressed,  ready  to  attend  sometimes  two  or  three 
parties  on  a  night,  and  never  complaining  of  fa- 
tigue, she  attributed  her  apprehensions  to  igno- 
rance alone,  and  concluded  that  fashionable  la- 
dies were  endued  with  greater  strength  than  she 
supposed  ; — but,  in  a  short  time,  Mrs.  Stanley 
sunk  into  a  rapid  decline,  which  prevented  her  at- 
tending her  favorite  parties  ;  though  then  she 
could  not  be  without  her  dearest  amusements,  and 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  135 

a  few  select  friends  were  daily  invited  to  form  a 
card-party  in  her  dressing-room.  All  the  morn- 
ing, she  would  have  the  mantua-makers  and  mil- 
liners with  her  :  thinking  this  a  good  opportunity 
of  consulting  them,  and  ordering  new  dresses  ac- 
cording to  her  own  improved  ideas. 

The  compliments  these  people  found  it  their 
interest  to  pay  her,  flattered  her  vanity  ;  as  also 
the  readiness  with  which  her  little  coterie  con- 
tributed to  her  amusement ;  so  that  the  confine- 
ment she  was  now  obliged  to  submit  to  gave  her 
no  uneasiness,  and  she  thence  drew  a  favorable 
conclusion,  "that  she  could  not  be  so  fond  of  dis- 
sipation, since  she  remained  so  quietly  at  home, 
and  no  one  heard  her  express  a  wish  to  go  out 
again  till  the  physician  gave  her  leave  ;"  her  in- 
disposition appeared  to  Mr.  Stanley  so  slight,  that, 
though  Ellen  wished  to  pay  every  attention  to  her 
mother  while  thus  confined,  he  would  not  let  her 
forego  the  pleasure  of  attending  the  Oratorios 
with  him. 

To  one  so  fond  of  music,  and  so  well  able  to 
judge  of  its  beauties,  as  was  Ellen,  it  is  unneces- 
sary to  add,  these  sacred  performances  must  give 
pleasure,  particularly  as  her  mind  was  attuned  to 
the  parts  of  Scripture  which  she  heard ;  and 
heightened  as  their  glorious  beauties  were  by  the 
powers  of  music,  her  rapture  would  have  been 
almost  divine,  had  not  the  vacant  looks  of  too  ma- 
ny of  the  auditors  convinced  her  that  she  was  not 
yet  admitted  to  the  music  of  the  spheres  ;  since, 
there,  "  all  hearts  exult,  and  with  unwearied  en- 
ergy proclaim  their  Maker's  praise  :"  here  were 
few  to  join  the  emulative   choir,  and  not  many 


136  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

who  listened  to  their  songs,  as  if  they  had  no  in- 
terest in  the  blessings  they  were  celebrating,  but 
chiefly  praised  the  strain  without  attending  to  its 
subject. 

As  the  time  for  Ellen's  visiting  her  aunt  drew 
near,  she  perceived  with  grief  that  her  mother's 
health  did  not  amend  ;  and  she  determined  at 
once  to  give  up  this  long-thought-of  pleasure, 
rather  than  leave  her  in  so  precarious  a  state, — 
particularly  as,  by  the  physician's  look,  when 
questioned  as  to  her  recovery,  she  feared  his 
opinion  was  not  favorable,  and  she  ventured  to 
hint  it  to  her  father  ;  who,  though  fashionable  in 
other  respects,  began  now  to  be  alarmed,  and  to 
inquire  more  earnestly  if  farther  advice  were  ne- 
cessary. 

It  was  now  Ellen  experienced  the  severe  trial 
of  seeing  one  whom  it  was  her  duty  to  love  and 
respect,  drawing  near  her  grave,  to  all  appearance 
without  one  serious  thought  of  her  approaching 
end  ! 

"  Can  she,"  said  she  to  herself,  "  know  that, 
after  this  life,  an  Eternity  will. follow  ;  and  yet,  be 
so  indifferent  as  to  what  it  may  prove  to  her  ?  and 
that  great  day  of  Judgment !"  continued  this  affec- 
tionate girl,  thus  anxious  for  a  mother  who  had 
seldom  bestowed  a  thought  on  her — "  when  all 
must  give  an  account  of  their  works  ! — can  she 
know  of  this,  and  yet  think  only  of  cards  and 
dress  ?  Merciful  Father !  what  can  I  do  for 
her  ?" 

Such  were  Ellen's  reflections,  on  hearing  the 
physician  say  he  had  but  little  hope  of  her  mo- 
ther's recovery,   and   that,  though  her   disorder 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  137 

was  a  lingering  one,  it  appeared  beyond  the  reach 
of  medicine. 

Mr.  Stanley  was  not  willing  to  believe  this  fa- 
tal prognostic. —  "They  are  always  for  making 
their  patients  worse  than  they  really  are,"  said 
he,  on  observing  Ellen's  distress,  "  that  their 
skill  in  curing  them  may  appear  the  greater  :"  yet 
he  felt  some  sorrow  ;  and  it  was  only  by  driving 
away  the  fear  that  it  was  not  without  cause,  that 
he  could  expel  it. 

It  was  not  so  with  Ellen :  she  thought  of  her 
dear  sister's  happy  death,  and  shuddered  at  the 
comparison  her  fancy  would  have  drawn  ;  but  she 
instantly  determined  to  use  all  her  time  and  en- 
deavors in  preparing  one  who  seemed  so  little 
aware  of  the  change  awaiting  her,  for  the  like 
exit :  but  how  was  she  to  begin  the  arduous  task  1 
and  when  ? — When  she  found  her  mother  disen- 
gaged, (which  was  but  seldom,)  she  would  only 
talk  of  what  would  amuse  her  ;  and  if  Ellen  of- 
fered to  read,  it  was  generally  refused,  or  stipu- 
lated that  it  should  be  in  a  book  that  was  enter- 
taining ;  yet,  by  her  assiduous  attention  to  all 
her  mother's  real  or  imaginary  wants,  she  made 
herself  useful,  and  her  company  became  desirable 
to  her :  for,  though  there  was  a  seriousness  in 
Ellen's  manner  which  struck  her  as  different  from 
her  other  friends,  Mrs.  Stanley  was  always  anx- 
ious to  have  her  in  the  room.  When  free  from 
pain,  she  would  assume  an  air  of  gayety,  and  ask 
her  daughter  why  she  looked  so  dull  ? — "  I  fear," 
said  she,  "  you  do  not  like  this  sick  room  :  I  am 
sorry  for  it,  for  you  make  an  excellent  nurse.  I 
13* 


138  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

feel  now,"  added  she,  with  some  emotion,  "  that  it 
is  a  comfort  to  have  a  daughter." 

This  was  acknowledging  more  than  Ellen  ex- 
pected ;  and  she  could  scarcely  conceal  the  tear 
which  trembled  in  her  eye,  while,  reflecting  much 
more  seriously  on  her  situation  than  her  mother 
apprehended,  she  answered,  "  I  am  happy  to  hear 
you  say  so,  my  dear  mother  :  but  do  you  really 
think  I  do  not  like  to  be  with  you  ?  Oh,  I  should 
like  to  spend  not  only  all  my  time,  but  eternity 
with  you !" 

"  Eternity !"  said  the  vacant-minded  woman, 
"that's  a  great  way  off:  you  have  dull  ideas, 
Ellen ;  that's  the  only  disadvantage  I  find  in  you 
as  a  nurse." 

"  My  sister  Anna,"  answered  Ellen,  trembling 
and  distressed,  "  did  not  think  so  :  when  she  was 
ill,  she  used  to  say  she  found  nothing  dull." 

"  That's  very  odd !"  replied  Mrs.  Stanley ; 
"  for  in  such  retirements  as  Milwood  she  could 
see  no  company." 

Ellen  sighed.  "  She  is  in  heavenly  company 
now,"  said  she,  "  and  does  not,  1  dare  say,  regret 
that  she  saw  no  more  of  this  world's  good." 

"  Poor  girl !  she  saw  very  little  pleasure  in- 
deed !"  returned  her  mother,  with  perfect  indiffer- 
ence. "  But  call  Naylin,  my  dear ;  I  think  I 
could  eat  a  little  jelly.  Don't  you  think,"  added 
she,  as  she  held  a  pocket-glass  to  her  face,  "  I 
look  better  to-day  ?  or  else  this  cap  becomes  me 
very  much." 

On  such  a  conclusion  to  a  conversation  which 
she  hoped  would  have  led  to  something  more  se- 
rious, Ellen  could  not  help  feeling  pity  and  re- 


THE  TWIN   SISTERS.  139 

gret,  but  forbore  expressing  either  ;  and,  ringing 
the  bell,  she  complied  with  her  mother's  re- 
quest. 

The  next  day,  Mrs.  Stanley  was  still  better ; 
and  the  physicians  thought  change  of  air  might 
be  of  service,  though  they  could  by  no  means 
flatter  her  family  that  the  amendment  then  per- 
ceived would  be  lasting. 

Windsor  was  recommended  ;  and  thither  Mrs. 
Stanley,  attended  by  her  maid  and  Ellen,  was 
removed,  by  a  slow  and  easy  conveyance  ;  and 
Mr.  Stanley  promised  to  pay  them  frequent  visits. 

She  had  not  been  there  a  fortnight  before  she 
fancied  herself  much  worse,  and  was  impatient 
for  the  arrival  of  the  physician,  who  had  promis- 
ed to  attend  her,  as  she  was  at  so  short  a  distance 
from  town. 

When  Ellen  was  called  to  conduct  him  to  her 
mother,  he  said  he  was  sorry  to  hear  from  the 
servant  that  Mrs.  Stanley's  spirits  were  depressed. 
"  We  must  be  particularly  careful  to  avoid  this," 
said  he,  4'..as  nothing  is  so  likely  to  be  hurtful  to 
her." 

"  But,  Sir,"  said  the  anxious  girl,  "  do  you  think 
that,  with  freedom  from  care  or  uneasiness,  there 
is  any  hope  of  recovery  ?" 

The  gentleman  hesitated  as  he  pronounced  his 
fear  that  a  very  few  months  would  terminate  her 
existence  ;  though  he  added,  "  if  the  state  of  her 
mind  were  not  carefully  attended  to,  it  might  be 
greatly  shortened ;  indeed,"  continued  he,  "  her 
life  depends  upon  the  composure  of  her  nerves." 
"  But  what,"  said  Ellen,  with  great  emotion. 
"  what  will  it  avail  her  to  live   three  or   four 


140  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

months  longer,  if  at  the  last  she  leaves  this  world 
without  thought  or  preparation  for  another  ?" 

"  Oh,  my  dear  young  lady  !"  replied  this  man 
of  science,  "  you  think  too  seriously  of  these 
things  :  there  is  little  to  be  done  upon  a  sick-bed  ! 
neither  is  it  my  province  to  prepare  people  for 
the  other  world  ;  my  profession  is  rather  to  keep 
them  here  :  and  I  again  repeat,  that  without  great 
composure  of  nerves,  nothing  is  to  be  expected  ; 
and,  above  all,  everything  should  be  done  to  pre- 
vent her  fearing  her  own  dissolution." 

Seeing  Ellen  not  disposed  to  answer,  he  pro- 
posed going  up  stairs,  saying,  "  he  should  be 
better  able  to  judge  after  he  had  seen  his  patient." 

On  his  admittance  to  Mrs.  Stanley  she  declar- 
ed herself  much  better  ;  though,  before,  she  had 
fancied  her  removal  had  not  been  of  service. 
She  talked  to  him  of  her  friends  in  town  ;  and  he, 
following  the  plan  he  had  advised,  endeavored  to 
amuse  her  by  relating  several  occurrences  of  the 
fashionable  world  during  her  absence  ;  and  when 
he  left  her,  it  was  with  large  expressions  of  un- 
meaning hope  that  in  a  very  short  time  he  should 
find  her  quite  well. 

Ellen  followed  him  out  of  the  room,  with  some 
degree  of  anger  at  his  duplicity,  and  then  asked 
him  if  there  was  any  appearance  of  real  amend- 
ment ? 

"  Why,  upon  my  word,  madam,"  said  he,  "  I 
do  not  see  any  great  alteration  for  the  better ;  but 
I  am  happy  to  observe  Mrs.  Stanley  in  such  good 
spirits  ;  my  whole  reliance  is  upon  them."  And 
then  hastily  wishing  her  a  good  morning,  he  re- 
ceived his  fee,  and  stepped  into  his  chariot ;  while 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  141 

Ellen,  shocked  at  his  behavior,  returned  to  her 
mother,  who  now  expressed  a  wish  to  have  some- 
thing read  which  should  lull  her  to  sleep  ;  as, 
though  she  found  the  doctor's  conversation  very 
pleasant,  she  owned  it  had  nearly  exhausted 
her. 

Mr.  Stanley  had  been  once  to  see  them  during 
their  stay  at  Windsor  ;  and  next  day  he  paid  them 
a  second  visit. 

As  he  dined  with  Ellen,  she  asked  after  their 
musical  friends,  and  was  surprised  to  hear  him 
say  he  had  not  seen  any  of  them  since  she  left 
home  ;  "  In  short,"  said  he,  "  I  begin  to  be  tired 
of  the  same  thing." 

Ellen  thought  of  what  she  had  heard  of  the 
wavering  pursuit  of  pleasure,  and  sighed  to  ob- 
serve it  realized  in  her  father ;  but  when  she 
gathered  from  his  farther  conversation  that  he  had 
entered  into  a  set  of  high  players,  she  feared  this 
would  prove  a  much  more  dangerous  pursuit  than 
that  which  he  had  abandoned. 

On  his  taking  leave  of  Mrs.  Stanley,  she  press- 
ed his  longer  stay  ;  but  he  refused,  being  engaged 
to  a  particular  party,  whom  he  said  he  could  not 
disappoint.  "  Besides,"  added  he,  with  an  air  of 
forced  gayety,  "  they  have  got  a  considerable  sum 
of  my  money  in  their  hands,  which  I  intend  this 
evening  to  rescue  from  them." 

Ellen  felt  more,  on  hearing  this,  than  her  mother, 
who  paid  little  regard  to  it. 

Nearly  three  months  passed  in  this  manner : 
the  physicians  continued  to  attend  Mrs.  Stanley, 
and  to  flatter  her  with  hopes  of  her  recovery ; 
while  to  Ellen  they  contradicted  all  their  asser- 


142  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

tions  ;  and  she  remained  in  dreadful  anxiety, 
doubting  whether  she  should  express  her  fears  to 
her  mother,  who  appeared  to  have  no  fears  for 
herself,  and  whose  conversation  was  continually 
of  returning  to  the  world  and  partaking  of  her 
former  amusements. 

Her  father  visited  them  but  seldom  ;  and  noth- 
ing was  said  of  the  manner  in  which  he  spent  his 
time,  till  one  morning  Ellen's  fears  were  again 
revived  by  his  very  distressed  countenance,  and 
his  appearing  unusually  grave  as  he  spoke  with 
great  displeasure  of  the  party  he  had  been  in  the 
night  before. 

All  thoughts  of  this  were,  however,  presently 
driven  from  her  mind  by  a  still  more  alarming 
subject. — As  they  were  sitting  after  dinner,  her 
mother's  bell  rang  violently  !  when,  knowing  the 
servants  never  left  her,  she  was  much  frighten- 
ed ;  and  hastening  to  the  room,  her  fears  were 
still  more  increased  by  the  maid's  exclaiming,  her 
mistress  was  dead  ! 

Ellen  ran  to  the  bed,  and  perceived  she  had 
fainted  :  the  common  applications  had  already 
been  used,  and  no  sign  of  recovery  appeared. 
Her  distress  was  very  great :  the  physician  was 
immediately  sent  for  ;  but  before  his  arrival  Mrs. 
Stanley  seemed  a  little  to  revive. 

Her  husband,  who  had  entered  the  room  on  the 
first  alarm,  seemed  to  feel  her  situation  : — "  What 
can  I  do  for  you,  my  dear  V  said  he,  taking  her 
almost  lifeless  hand. 

She  was  not  insensible  of  his  kindness,  though 
incapable  of  returning  it. 

"  I  feel — I  feel,"  said  she,  struggling  for  speech, 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  143 

"  I  must  leave  this  world  : — Oh,  whither  am  I 
going  ?" 

No  answer  was  returned  to  this  solemn  ques- 
tion :  Ellen's  grief  was  too  excessive  ;  and  her 
father,  lost  in  sorrow  and  affright,  stood  gazing  on 
the  afflicting  scene  ;  it  was  what  till  now  he  had 
never  witnessed ;  and  a  death-bed  is  seldom 
thought  of  by  the  gay  and  dissipated  ;  yet  it  is 
what  we  must  all  experience.  This  Mr.  Stanley 
knew  ;  but  till  now,  he  had  never  viewed  the  aw- 
ful certainty  ;  and  his  wife's  solicitous  inquiry  of 
"  Whither  am  I  going  ?"  seemed  to  strike  upon 
his  heart  as  necessary  also  for  himself. 

Mrs.  Stanley  endeavored  to  say  more  ;  but  her 
voice  failed,  and  her  eyes  closed, — never  more 
to  open,  but  on  eternity ! — 

Her  afflicted  daughter,  falling  on  her  knees, 
exclaimed,  "  Gracious  Heaven,  have  mercy  on 
her !"  but  this  petition  was  unknown  to  the  de- 
parted mother.  Alarm  and  fear  were  pictured  on 
her  countenance,  and  it  is  to  be  feared  she  breath- 
ed her  last  without  any  preparation  for  a  future 
life  ;  though  nature,  conscience,  all  before  this 
solemn  moment,  must  have  assured  her  that  this 
was  not  to  be  the  end  of  her  existence. 

Oh  ye  thoughtless  votaries  of  pleasure  !  reflect 
on  the  end  of  such  a  life,  and  consider  whether 
you  can  bear  the  prospect  of  closing  yours  like 
her !  Look  back  to  the  happy  death  of  a  real 
Christian,  exemplified  in  that  of  Anna,  and  say 
which  is  to  be  preferred  ! 

"•Sure  'tis  a  serious  thing,  my  soul,  to  die  ! 

If  there's  an  hereafter  ; 

And  that  there  is,  Conscience,  uninfluenced, 


144  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

And  suffer'd  to  speak  out,  tells  every  man  ; 
Then  must  it  be  a  serious  thing  to  die." — 

Blair. 

— It  is  so  even  to  those  who,  having  found  a  shel- 
ter from  the  wrath  to  come,  find  death  disarmed  ; 
but  when  the  eye  is  about  to  open  on  another 
world,  where  all  things  are  new  and  unconsider- 
ed of,  how  dreadful  must  be  the  summons  !  It  is 
only  by  frequent  contemplations  on  a  future  state, 
we  come  to  know  the  true  value  of  this  :  and  then 
we  learn  the  insignificancy  of  all  earthly  things,  un- 
less seen  in  the  connexion  with  those  of  Heaven  : 
it  is  then  we  see  that  our  most  trifling  actions 
in  this  world  are  of  consequence  : — and  yet 
how  many  are  there  who  thoughtlessly  pursue 
their  own  inclinations,  neither  reflecting  on  them 
here,  nor  considering  that  they  must  account  for 
them  hereafter. 

But  to  return  to  our  history. 

As  soon  as  all  was  over,  in  regard  to  this  life, 
with  the  once  gay  and  admired  Mrs.  Stanley,  her 
husband  left  the  room :  while  Ellen  remained 
watching  her  mother,  in  trembling  hope  that  she 
might,  as  at  the  first,  have  only  fainted :  but  the 
wan  paleness  of  death  soon  spread  itself  over  that 
once  handsome  face,  and  she  was  obliged  to  re- 
sign the  expectation  her  anxious  affection  could 
alone  give  rise  to. 

When  she  entered  the  room  where  her  father 
was,  she  took  his  hand,  but  spoke  not ;  and  he 
appeared  equally  unable  to  address  her.  They 
sat  in  silence — Ellen's  heart  raised  in  prayer,  till 
the  recollection  of  her  very  different  feelings  on 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  145 

the  death  of  her  sister  forced  a  flood  of  tears  from 
her  eyes. 

The  attention  of  her  father  was  awakened  by 
her  strong  emotion  :  and  he  endeavored  to  con- 
sole her,  as  one  who  knows  no  higher  source  of 
comfort  than  temporal  considerations. 

"  Though  this  event  was  so  unexpected  by  us," 
said  he,  "  yet  we  might  have  been  prepared  for 
it :  the  physicians  gave  us  little  hope  of  her  re- 
covery ;  but  everything  was  done  to  promote  it, 
and  we  have  nothing  to  reproach  ourselves  with  : 
you,  especially,  my  dear  Ellen,  have  been  a  most 
attentive  daughter." 

Ellen's  grief  prevented  her  reply.  The  time 
of  his  own  dissolution  again  rushed  upon  the 
mind  of  Mr.  Stanley  ;  and  he  expressed  a  wish 
that,  in  his  last  illness,  she  might  be  with  him ; 
he  woidd  then,  he  thought,  be  very  solicitous  in 
making  those  inquiries  which,  from  the  education 
she  had  received,  he  judged  her  better  able  to 
answer  than  himself. 

"  Poor  woman  !"  continued  he  ;  "  had  she  known 
how  soon  she  was  to  die — !" 

He  paused  ;  and  Ellen  recovered  sufficiently 
to  reply  :  "  Ah,  my  dear  father,  it  is  the  very  cir- 
cumstance of  not  knowing  the  time  of  our  death, 
which  should  make  us  desirous  of  being  always 
prepared  for  it." 

The  entrance  of  a  servant  put  an  end  to  this 
interesting  conversation ;  and  when  they  were 
again  alone,  he  proposed  sending  for  her  aunt. 
"  Mrs.  Irvin's  company  might  be  a  comfort  to  you," 
said  he  ;  "  do  you  think  she  would  come  ?" 

"  Oh  yes,  that  she  would,"  exclaimed  Ellen, 
13 


146  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

"  unless  prevented  by  illness  ;  which  Heaven 
forbid  !  for  if  I  lose  her — " 

— "  You  would  not  be  without  a  friend,  my 
Ellen,"  rejoined  her  father,  affectionately  :  "  your 
kindness  to  your  mother  has  endeared  you  to  me. 
and  I  shall  never  forget  it.  But  come,  write  to 
your  aunt,  and  I  will  send  it  off  by  express  :  if 
she  get  it  to-morrow  morning,  she  may  be  here 
in  the  evening." 

This  proposal  was  indeed  a  comfort  to  poor 
Ellen  :  and  having  written  what  her  feelings  dic- 
tated on  so  melancholy  an  occasion,  a  man  and 
horse  were  immediately  despatched  with  the 
letter. 

In  the  evening,  Mr.  Stanley  again  reverted  to  the 
death  of  his  wife. — "  Had  I  known  how  soon  I  was 
to  lose  the  dear  woman,"  said  he,  "  nothing  should 
have  tempted  me  to  leave  her  as  I  have  done  ; 
indeed,  I  would  have  taken  up  my  abode  here  ; — 
and  it  would  have  been  better  for  me,"  continued 
he,  thoughtfully,  "  if  I  had.  Ah,  Ellen  !  you  don't 
know  what  I  have  done  !  Could  you  think  that 
I  have  lost  above  fifteen  thousand  pounds  at  play 
since  you  have  been  at  this  place  ?" 

"  No,  indeed,  my  dear  father,"  said  she,  "  know- 
ing you  were  not  fond  of  cards  ;  but  I  hope  it  will 
be  the  last  time  you  will  lose,  or  ever  play  for 
such  a  considerable  sum  :  if  amusement  can  ever 
be  found  in  cards,  I  should  think  they  must  cease 
to  afford  it  when  so  much  is  depending  on  them." 

Mr.  Stanley  secretly  acknowledged  this,  but  he 
only  answered  that  he  could  very  well  afford  it, 
and  dropped  the  subject. 

The  next  day  passed  heavily  with  Ellen.    Her 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  147 

father  had  already  expressed  impatience  to  return 
to  town  ;  but  she  begged  him  to  stay  at  least  till 
her  aunt  was  come. — As  the  evening  approached, 
she  anxiously  expected  her  arrival ;  and  when 
the  servant  told  her  the  carriage  was  at  the  door, 
her  emotion  nearly  overcame  her. 

Mrs.  Irvin  was  soon  in  the  room,  and  Ellen 
threw  herself  into  her  arms. — For  some  moments 
neither  could  speak  :  till  Mrs.  Irvin,  possessing  a 
more  than  common  fortitude,  pressed  her  niece  to 
her  heart,  and  begged  her  to  be  composed. — "  Oh, 
my  Ellen,"  said  she,  "  you  have  not  forgotten 
where  our  true  strength  lies  ?  Look  up,  my  child  ; 
all  is  in  the  hand  of  God." 

These  words  were  as  a  cordial  to  the  afflicted 
heart  of  Ellen ;  it  was  so  long  since  she  had 
heard  an  expression  of  this  sort,  or  had  spoken 
to  one  whose  mind  was  exalted  to  higher  views 
than  what  this  world  affords,  and  who  would  ad- 
mit religion  as  the  truest  source  of  comfort,  and 
had  experienced  it  to  be  so ;  and  she  felt  her 
heart  raised  in  gratitude  to  God  for  having  sent 
her  such  a  friend. 

"  Remember,  my  dear,"  said  Mrs.  Irvin,  "  we 
are  to  look  upon  this  world  but  as  a  state  of  trial  ; 
if  some  pass  through  it  without  experiencing  af- 
fliction, it  is  to  be  feared  it  is  to  their  disadvan- 
tage." She  sighed  as  she  spoke,  and  added, 
"  Afflictions  are  certainly  for  our  benefit ;  and  it 
is  in  mercy  they  are  sent.  But  come,  my  dear," 
continued  she,  "  where  is  your  father  ?  he  must 
want  a  friend  more  particularly  at  this  time : — 
Will  he  see  me  ?" 


148  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

Ellen  rang  the  bell,  and  sent  a  servant  to  in- 
quire if  they  might  be  admitted. 

Again  Mr.  Stanley  felt  grief ;  (for  it  would  be 
uncharitable  to  affirm  that  it  was  only  the  sem- 
blance of  sorrow  he  expressed  to  Mrs.  Irvin  when 
they  met ;)  but  it  was  soon  removed,  and  his  read- 
iness to  talk  on  other  subjects  showed  he  was  not 
deeply  affected. 

When  Mrs.  Irvin  returned  to  Ellen's  room,  by 
her  desire  she  accompanied  her  to  the  bed-side 
of  her  departed  sister.  How  awful  was  this 
scene  !  The  recollection  of  her  life  could  not 
raise  their  hopes  of  her  happiness,  nor  would  the 
duty  of  Christian  resignation  allow  them  to  re- 
pine. Tears  streamed  from  the  eyes  of  Ellen,  as 
she  viewed,  for  the  last  time,  the  inanimate  body 
of  her  departed  mother  ;  and  had  not  her  affec- 
tionate aunt,  judging  of  her  feelings  by  her  own, 
hurried  her  from  the  apartment,  her  grief  might 
have  arisen  to  murmur, — perhaps  to  dispute  the 
ways  of  Providence,  which,  nevertheless,  are  just 
and  merciful  to  all ;  but  if  His  creatures  will 
stifle  conscience,  drive  from  their  minds  every 
serious  reflection,  and,  neglecting  the  means  of 
grace,  seek  only  for  the  ease  and  pleasures  of  this 
life, — is  God  the  cause  ?  who,  by  His  word,  by 
His  ministers,  and  by  His  providence,  has  given 
to  all  men,  and  especially  in  this  Christian  land, 
an  opportunity  of  repentance,  and  of  knowing 
their  need  of  it  1  Mrs.  Irvin  had  recourse  to 
prayer,  and  afterward  read  to  her  niece  several 
passages  of  Scripture  in  which  we  are  required 
to  love  God  above  all  things,  and  to  submit  to 
His  will  in  every  event  of  life. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  149 

The  exercise  of  devotion  calmed  their  minds  : 
they  retired  to  rest  with  humble  trust  in  the  Al- 
mighty, and  thankful  acknowledgment  of  His 
goodness. 

13* 


150  THE    TWIN    STSTERS. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

"  True  happiness  is  of  a  retired  nature,  and  an  enemy  to 
pomp  and  noise." 

In  a  few  days,  the  last  duties  were  paid  to  Mrs. 
Stanley,  and  the  whole  family  returned  to  town. 
Mrs.  Irvin  proposed  taking  Ellen  with  her  to 
Milwood,  as  she  much  feared  her  late  confinement 
and  anxiety  respecting  her  mother  had  injured 
her  health  and  spirits  ;  and  to  this  plan  her  niece 
had  but  one  objection, — which  was,  lest  the  leav- 
ing her  father  entirely  without  domestic  society 
would  induce  him  to  be  more  in  the  company  he 
had  lately  frequented. 

She  mentioned  these  apprehensions  to  her  aunt, 
who,  though  she  was  not  without  similar  fears, 
continued  to  press  her  leaving  him  for  a  little 
while,  and  endeavored  to  lead  her  to  hope,  that 
when  all  worldly  pursuits  were  tried,  and  satis- 
faction found  in  none,  he  would  more  readily  ac- 
knowledge the  wisdom  of  theirs,  and,  from  expe- 
riencing the  evil  of  his  errors,  be  more  inclined 
to  quit  them. 

On  these  considerations,  Ellen,  with  a  mixture 
of  feeling  not  to  be  defined,  took  leave  of  her 
father.  He  embraced  her  very  affectionately,  as- 
sured her  of  his  continual  regard,  and  that,  in  the 
course  of  the  summer,  he  would  come  himself  to 
Milwood,  and  fetch  her  thence. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  151 

With  many  prayers  for  his  welfare,  Ellen  en- 
tered the  carriage  which  was  to  convey  her,  with 
her  beloved  aunt,  to  the  scenes  of  her  earliest 
youth,  where  her  happiest  days  had  been  spent, 
and  where  she  hoped  once  more  to  feel  the  plea- 
sure of  doing  good. 

Their  conversation  during  their  journey  was  of 
the  many  changes  that  had  taken  place  at  Mil  wood 
in  her  absence  ;  several  of  her  poor  old  friends 
were  dead  ;  and  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Campbell,  the  family 
mentioned  before,  were  settled  in  their  neighbor- 
hood. 

As  they  approached  the  place,  Ellen's  heart 
beat  high  with  expectation  ;  she  forgot  her  recent 
cause  for  sorrow  ;  and  the  thought  of  soon  seeing 
her  dear  and  good  Martin  gave  way  to  all  others. 

"  Mr.  Herbert,  too,  I  shall  see  him  ;  but  not  to- 
night," added  she,  checking  her  impatience  ;  and 
at  that  moment  looking  out  of  the  window,  she 
saw  him  riding  with  another  gentleman,  whom 
she  recollected  to  be  Mr.  Campbell.  Though  he 
was  nearly  a  stranger  to  her,  she  could  not  re- 
press her  desire  of  speaking  to  her  old  and  valued 
friend  ;  and  as  his  attention  seemed  to  be  drawn 
toward  the  carriage,  she  waved  her  hand,  and 
was  soon  recognised  by  Mr.  Herbert,  who  im- 
mediately rode  to  the  side  of  it ;  and  the  joy  of 
again  meeting  each  other  appeared  equal  in  both. 

Martin  was  at  the  door  to  receive  her  mistress  ; 
and  her  countenance  beamed  with  joy  on  seeing 
Ellen  with  her,  who  at  that  moment  forgot  every 
other  object  of  attention,  and  flew  to  embrace  the 
nurse  of  her  childhood,  with  the  same  affection 


152  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

as  if  she  had  been  still  an  infant,  and  stood  in 
need  of  her  protection  and  assistance. 

All  the  servants  now  came  round  her,  each  de- 
sirous of  her  notice  ;  and  she  spoke  to  them  with 
the  kindness  their  former  services  merited ; 
though,  to  use  their  own  expression,  "  she  had 
been  so  long  in  London,  and  looked  so  like  a  fine 
lady." 

Their  arrival  was  soon  announced  through  all 
the  village ;  but  the  account  "  that  Miss  Ellen 
was  come  down  with  their  good  lady,"  could 
scarcely  be  credited,  till  several  of  the  inhabitants 
had  been  to  the  door  to  inquire  of  the  servants  if 
it  really  were  so. 

"  And  is  she  as  free  as  ever  ?"  said  they : 
"  God  bless  her !  To-night,  to  be  sure,  we  must 
not  think  of  seeing  her  ;  but  to-morrow  we  hope 
we  shall." 

"  Thank  God,  I  am  alive  to  see  my  dear  young 
lady  once  more  !"  said  poor  old  Dame  Hunt,  when 
Betsy  Forbes,  who  was  one  of  the  first  to  make 
the  inquiry,  told  her  the  welcome  news  :  "  and 
will  she  talk  to  us  and  read  to  us  the  same  as 
ever  ?  Oh,  Mary,  this  is  a  happy  day  for  you 
and  me  !"  added  the  good  old  woman. 

"  Ay,  and  for  all  of  us  !"  replied  one  of  a  nu- 
merous flock  of  girls  belonging  to  the  school 
who  had  assembled  round  the  door  to  hear  the 
joyful  tidings.  "  If  she  does  not  come  among  us 
before,  at  least  we  shall  see  her  at  church  ;  for  I 
am  sure  she  will  be  there.  Oh,  how  I  wish  Sun- 
day was  come !" 

But  they  had  not  so  long  to  wait  for  their  ex- 
pected pleasure  ;  as  the  very  next  morning  Ellen, 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  153 

who  was  quite  as  impatient  to  see  them,  walked 
first  to  Dame  Hunt's,  and  then  to  the  school,  con- 
vincing them  all,  by  her  accustomed  kindness, 
that  she  had  not  forgotten  her  promise  of  remem- 
bering them  in  her  absence.  To  all  she  met,  she 
spoke  with  the  affection  of  a  friend ;  while  the 
artless  simplicity  with  which  they  welcomed  her 
reappearance  among  them  drew  tears  from  her 
eyes. 

On  her  return  to  her  aunt,  she  found  Mr.  Her- 
bert with  her  ;  and  her  first  transport  of  pleasure 
having  now  subsided,  she  could  talk  with  this  ex- 
cellent man,  and  listen  to  his  improving  conver- 
sation with  gratitude  and  attention. 

He  but  slightly  adverted  to  the  melancholy 
scene  she  had  lately  witnessed  ;  but  on  observing 
the  gloomy  sorrow  which  immediately  overspread 
her  countenance  at  the  least  mention  of  her 
mother's  death,  he  endeavored  to  remove  it  by 
every  argument  in  his  power,  confirmed  by  the 
consolations  and  commands  of  Scripture. 

The  grateful  girl  shed  tears  of  pity  and  regret, 
when  she  considered  how  little  of  these  her  la- 
mented mother  had  known  ;  and  the  fear  that  she 
had  not  sufficiently  studied  the  opportunities  of 
impressing  them  on  her  mind  again  assailed  her. 

Mr.  Herbert  tried  to  comfort  her  under  these 
doubts  ;  he  made  allowances  for  her  which  she 
could  not  admit  for  herself ;  but  his  chief  argu- 
ments were  drawn  from  the  comforting  assurance, 
that  her  desire  was  known  to  God,  and  that, 
through  her  Redeemer,  her  services,  though  im- 
perfect, would  be  accepted. 

The  entrance  of  Mrs.  Campbell  and  two  of  her 


154  THE   TWIN  SISTERS. 

daughters  put  a  stop  to  this  interesting  conversa- 
tion ;  and  Ellen  was  obliged  to  suppress  her  feel- 
ings while  she  attended  to  the  forms  of  civility, 
and  received  the  young  ladies  as  her  visiters. 

Mrs.  Irvin  appeared  much  obliged  by  her  early 
visit ;  and  Ellen  promised  herself  great  pleasure 
in  forming  a  sincere  friendship  with  them. 

They  talked  of  the  walks  they  should  take  to- 
gether, of  the  private  concerts  and  reading-parties 
which  they  should  form,  till  Ellen's  eyes  beamed 
with  pleasure  at  the  thought  of  once  more  parti- 
cipating in  these  innocent  enjoyments. 

Mr.  Herbert  attended  these  ladies  home  ;  and 
Mrs.  Irvin  and  Ellen  spent  the  rest  of  the  day 
quite  alone. 

As  the  latter  wandered  through  the  house  and 
lingered  in  every  room  which  brought  to  her 
memory  any  remembrance  of  her  sister,  how  did 
her  heart  sigh  at  the  recollection  !  Yet  the  re- 
trospect of  the  days  she  had  spent  since,  depriv- 
ed of  that  dear  friend,  was  still  more  distressing. 

"  Thus  it  is,"  said  she,  "  that  experience  makes 
us  wise  :  how  happy  am  I  once  more  to  return  to 
such  a  home  !  I  am  not  fit  to  live  in  the  world ; 
this  is  the  only  place  to  be  happy  in." 

"  Ah,  my  dear,"  replied  her  aunt,  "  you  must 
not  expect  it  even  here  ;  there  are  snares  for  our 
happiness  in  every  place  ;  it  is  not  where  we  are 
— not  from  ourselves,  that  we  must  expect  protec- 
tion from  them :  and  as  we  must  look  for  happi- 
ness above,  so  must  we  look  thither  for  help  and 
assistance  also  to  attain  it." 

In  a  few  days,  Mrs.  Irvin  and  her  niece  return- 
ed the  visit  of  Mrs.  and  Miss  Campbell ;  and  El- 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  155 

len  was  highly  pleased  with  the  whole  family. 
Large  as  it  was,  they  were  all  employed,  and  all 
seemed  united  in  a  wish  to  be  useful  to  each 
other.  There  were  five  girls  and  three  little 
boys,  whom  the  eldest  sister  was  instructing  to 
read  ;  the  younger  girls  were  also  under  her  tui- 
tion ;  and  every  hour  of  her  time  was  devoted  to 
their  improvement,  and  fully  occupied. 

When  Mrs.  Irvin  and  Ellen  entered,  their 
morning  tasks  were  just  completed,  and  they 
went,  as  usual,  to  amuse  themselves  in  the  gar- 
den. 

Thither  Ellen  walked  with  the  elder  Miss 
Campbell,  and  found  the  children  sitting  under  a 
shady  tree,  all  at  play  together.  They  seemed 
so  happy,  that,  though  Ellen  wished  to  go  and 
talk  to  them,  she  feared  disturbing  their  pleasure, 
till  Miss  Campbell  led  her  that  way,  and  intro- 
duced them  to  her  notice. 

Although  they  had  not  been  accustomed  to  con- 
verse with  strangers,  there  was  such  kindness  in 
Ellen's  manner,  that  they  soon  became  acquainted 
with  her  :  and  on  their  returning  to  the  house,  all 
the  young  ones  wrere  of  the  party. 

The  youngest,  little  Caroline,  particularly  at- 
tracted her  attention,  and  Mrs.  Irvin  proposed 
taking  her  home  to  dinner  : — "  And  then,"  said 
she,  "  we  may  hope  for  the  company  of  some 
of  the  elder  ladies,  who  will  fetch  their  sister 
home." 

The  face  of  the  innocent  child  was  covered 
with  blushes  at  the  unexpected  invitation,  and 
she  looked  anxiously  at  her  mother  for  permis- 
sion ;  who,  on  hearing  from  her  sister  that  she 


156  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

had  been  very  attentive  to  her  lessons  that  morn- 
ing, gave  her  consent ;  and  the  little  girl  ran  to  be 
dressed  for  her  visit. 

When  she  had  kissed  all  her  brothers  and  sis- 
ters, she  tripped  away  by  the  side  of  Ellen,  half 
pleased,  and  half  afraid  to  find  herself  entirely 
among  strangers ;  but  when  she  entered  Mrs. 
Irvin's  house,  the  attentive  fondness  of  her  new 
friend  soon  dissipated  her  fears.  She  was  not  quite 
five  years  old ;  but  her  understanding  was  far  above 
her  years,  and  had  already  been  greatly  cultivated. 

After  dinner,  Ellen  played  a  favorite  country 
dance. — "  Shall  I  dance  to  you  ?"  said  the  delight- 
ed child ;  "I  do  at  home,  whenever  my  sister 
plays  that  dance." 

Ellen  could  not  help  smiling  to  see  her  jump 
about  the  room,  and  gave  her  great  praise  for 
keeping  so  true  to  the  music. 

"  Oh,"  said  Caroline,  "  if  you  were  to  see  my 
sisters  Lucy  and  Fanny,  you  would  say  they 
dance  well :  but  they  are  older  than  I  am,  you 
know." 

When  Ellen  asked  if  they  had  any  master,  she 
did  not  know  what  was  meant  by  the  question. — 
"  Wliat!"  said  she,  "  does  a  master  teach  child- 
ren to  dance  ?  I  only  know  little  Master  Lambert, 
and  I  am  sure  he  cannot  dance  so  well  as  Lucy 
or  Fanny  : — we  teach  ourselves." 

When  asked  what  her  sister  taught  her,  she 
replied :  "  The  first  lesson  we  learn  every  morn- 
ing, is  to  know  God ;  for,  my  sister  says,  that 
is  the  thing  of  most  consequence  ;  and  so  I 
think,  because  he  is  so  very  good  to  us,  you 
know." 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  157 

Ellen  thought  so  too. — "  And  how  are  you 
taught  to  know  him  ?"  said  she.  "  Oh  !  have  you 
never  seen  Mrs.  Trimmer's  books  ?"  replied 
the  child  ;  "  my  sister  teaches  us  out  of  them, 
and  explains  them  to  us,  and  we  learn  some 
every  day ;  and  then  we  spell,  and  my  sisters 
write,  but  I  don't ;  and  we  play  at  cards." 

"  Play  cards  !"  said  Ellen  ;  "  sure,  that  is  not  a 
lesson  you  are  taught  ?" 

"  Yes,  we  are  ;  and  we  learn  a  great  deal  from 
them — that  is,  my  brothers  and  sisters  do  :  but  I 
cannot  understand  them  yet ;  so  I  have  only  now 
and  then  one, — such  as,  '  London  is  the  capital 
city  of  England,  and  Edinburgh  of  Scotland.' " 

"  Are  they  Geographical  Cards  you  play  with  V 
said  Ellen. 

"  Yes  ;  and  sometimes  Historical  Cards  :  we 
play  with  them  of  an  evening,  when  it  is  winter, 
but  not  in  the  summer.  I  can  work  too,"  con- 
tinued she  :  "  and  I  read  a  great  deal  every  morn- 
ing." 

"  How  much  have  you  read  to-day  ?"  said  El- 
len, smiling. 

"  Three  pages,  at  different  times  ;  besides 
spelling  eight  words  out  of  a  book,  and  saying 
my  first  lesson  from  Mrs.  Trimmer." 

When  this  little  chatterer  saw,  from  the  parlor- 
window,  her  eldest  sister  at  a  distance,  coming 
toward  the  house,  she  blushed  and  said,  "  Dear 
me,  I  hope  I  have  not  talked  too  much ;  have  I, 
ma'am  ?"  addressing  Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  for  they  told  me 
they  were  afraid  I  should  be  troublesome  :  have  I, 
Miss  Stanley  ?" 

Mrs.  Irvin  and  Ellen  both  assured  her  to  the 
14 


158  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

contrary :  and  she  began  to  talk  again. — "  How 
much  I  shall  have  to  tell  my  sister  before  I  go  to 
bed  ?  You  don't  know  how  good  she  is  to  us," 
continued  she :  "  every  evening  she  makes  us 
recollect  if  we  have  done  anything  to  offend  God  ; 
and  then,  when  we  say  our  prayers,  she  says 
we  may  beg  to  be  forgiven  for  Jesus  Christ's 
sake." 

"  You  have  a  very  excellent  sister  indeed," 
said  Ellen,  "  that  will  take  such  pains  with  you." 

"  Oh  !  she  does  take  pains  indeed,"  said  the 
charming  child  :  "  but  here  she  is,"  added  she  ; 
and  leaping  into  her  sister's  arms,  who  just  then 
entered  the  room,  she  exclaimed,  "  Oh,  my  dear 
sister  !  you  don't  know  how  happy  I  have  been  ! 
I  hope  Lucy  and  Fanny  will  come  soon,  and 
spend  just  such  another  day." 

Though  this  was  rather  like  asking  for  an  invi- 
tation for  them,  it  was  uttered  with  such  sim- 
plicity, that  her  sister  could  not  check  her  for  it ; 
but  returning  her  embrace,  she  asked  if  she  had 
forgotten  the  caution  she  had  given  her  ; — "  I  am 
afraid  you  have  tired  Miss  Stanley  with  your 
tongue  ?" — but  when  Ellen  replied  in  the  nega- 
tive, Caroline  exclaimed,  with  pleasure,  "  I  am 
glad  of  it ;  for  though  Mrs.  Irvin  and  Miss  Stan- 
ley were  good  enough  to  tell  me  I  did  not  talk 
too  much,  I  was  almost  afraid  I  had  ;  yet,  as  I 
never  came  out  on  a  visit  before,  I  hoped  too  that 
they  would  excuse  me." 

The  sisters  returned  early  that  evening,  on 
Caroline's  account,  whom  Mrs.  Irvin  kissed  at 
parting ;  and  desired  her  to  give  her  love  to  her 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  159 

other  sisters,  and  say,  she  hoped  to  see   them 
soon. 

This  invitation  seemed  to  give  the  little  girl  as 
much  pleasure  as  her  own  ;  and  as  she  took  leave 
of  Ellen,  who  walked  part  of  the  way  with  them, 
she  whispered  her,  "  I  shall  tell  Lucy  and  Fanny 
what  Mrs.  Irvin  said  ;  they  will  be  so  happy  ;  and 
I  am  sure  I  am  much  obliged  to  you  for  the  plea- 
sant day  I  have  had.  I  shall  thank  God  for  it, 
also,  in  my  prayers  to-night ;  for  my  sister  says 
we  should  always  do  so,  when  we  have  been  par- 
ticularly happy ;  and  I  am  sure  I  have." 

Ellen  kissed  the  innocent  child  ;  and  telling 
her  she  loved  her  better  than  ever,  she  parted 
from  her  eldest  sister  with  higher  notions  of  re- 
spect and  esteem,  and  a  still  greater  desire  to  be- 
come more  and  more  intimate  with  them. 

In  a  short  time  these  families  were  seldom 
apart ;  and  their  frequent  meetings  were  made 
still  more  pleasant  by  the  intent  of  them,  which 
was  either  to  relieve  the  poor,  or  improve  them- 
selves by  reading  to  each  other  what  would  in 
struct  them  in  the  great  duties  of  the  Christian 
life.  They  seldom  walked  without  entering  into 
some  cottage,  where  it  was  their  aim  to  remove 
the  wants  of  the  inmates,  comfort  their  sorrows, 
and  encourage  industry.  In  short,  Milwood  was 
noted  through  the  country,  as  "  the  happy  par- 
ish !"  and  there  were  none  of  its  inhabitants  who 
did  not  bear  witness  to  the  title. 

Ellen  had  her  little  favorite  often  with  her,  but 
not  till  Lucy  and  Fanny  had  paid  their  promised 
visit ;  and  if  at  any  time  these  children  were  in- 
attentive to  their  lessons,  it  was  soon  considered 


160  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

as  their  greatest  punishment  to  be  refused  going 
to  Mrs.  Irvin's  the  next  time  they  were  asked. 

The  summer  passed  quickly  away  ;  but  Ellen 
could  not  lose  all  anxiety  respecting  her  father  : 
she  had  often  written  to  him,  but  received  no  an- 
swer except  through  Miss  Arnold,  with  whom, 
for  his  sake,  she  kept  up  a  correspondence.  She 
assured  her  that  he  was  well ;  and,  as  he  was 
always  engaged,  they  concluded  he  must  be  happy  : 
but  Ellen  received  very  little  pleasure  from  this 
information. 

The  winter  approached,  and  Mr.  Stanley  ap- 
peared to  have  forgotten  his  promise  of  fetching 
his  daughter  from  Milwood.  The  Miss  Campbells 
saw  her  uneasiness,  though  they  knew  not  the 
cause  ;  and  endeavored,  by  drawing  the  most 
favorable  picture  of  the  approaching  season,  to 
remove  it.  They  talked  of  their  weekly  dances 
for  the  children,  and  that  a  bed  would  be  always 
prepared  for  her  whenever  she  liked  to  join  their 
party  :  they  had  music  in  variety  ;  and  their  eldest 
brother  also,  who  had  been  hitherto  engaged  as  a 
private  tutor  to  a  young  nobleman,  was  expected 
to  spend  the  winter  with  them,  when  their  work- 
ing parties  would  be  greatly  enlivened  by  his 
reading  to  them. 

Ellen  rejoiced  in  their  happiness  ;  and  nothing 
but  the  hope  of  being  useful  to  her  father  could 
induce  her  to  wish  to  leave  such  companions, 
whom  Mrs.  Irvin  promoted  her  being  with  as 
much  as  possible  ;  for,  though  it  sometimes  de- 
prived her  of  Ellen's  company,  she  hoped  the 
society  of  these  young  people  would  raise  her 
spirits,  and  enable  her  to  bear  with  fortitude  the 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  161 

trial  she  feared  would  soon  await  her,  as,  while 
she  encouraged  not  Ellen's  uneasiness,  her  own 
apprehensions  respecting  Mr.  Stanley  were  not  of 
a  less  serious  nature. 

When  the  winter  was  quite  set  in,  Ellen  could 
not  be  so  constant  a  visiter  at  the  Campbells'  as 
formerly  ;  and  one  morning,  as  she  was  mention- 
ing to  her  aunt,  as  an  extraordinary  circum- 
stance, that  she  had  not  seen  any  of  the  family 
for  three  or  four  days,  the  eldest  Miss  Campbell 
entered  the  room. 

There  was  a  more  than  usual  seriousness  on 
her  countenance  ;  and  Ellen,  scarcely  knowing 
what  she  feared,  earnestly  inquired  the  cause. 
Her  friend  hesitated  ;  and  at  length  said,  she  wish- 
ed to  speak  to  Mrs.  Irvin  alone. 

"  It  is  uneasiness  about  me  that  gives  you  un- 
easiness then  :  but  do  not  be  afraid  to  speak  ;  you 
know  I  shall  be  enabled  to  hear  ill  news  of  what- 
ever sort  it  may  be." 

Observing  Miss  Campbell's  distress  increase, 
she  added,  "  Does  it  relate  to  my  father  ?  do  tell 
me !"  Her  fears  gathering  strength  from  sus- 
pense, she  exclaimed,  "  He  is  not  dead  1  God 
forbid  it !"  Her  agitation  would  not  allow  her  to 
say  more  ;  but  she  looked  with  beseeching  en- 
treaty toward  Miss  Campbell  for  an  answer,  who 
hastened  to  relieve  her  terror,  by  assuring  her 
Mr.  Stanley  was  living  ;  but  she  acknowledged, 
from  the  account  her  brother  had  brought,  who 
had  arrived  the  evening  before,  it  was  feared  that 
he  was  very  ill ;  and  her  parents  thought  they 
should  not  act  a  friendly  part  toward  her,  in  not 
informing  her  of  it. 

14* 


162  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

"  Oh !  let  us  go  to  him  directly,  my  dear  aunt !" 
said  Ellen,  rising  from  her  chair.  "  You  will  not 
refuse  ;  pray  let  us  go  immediately." 

"  Compose  yourself,  my  dearest  child,"  replied 
Mrs.  Irvin  ;  "  and  be  assured  I  am  ready  to  ac- 
company you :  but  remember,  while  you  are  so 
agitated,  your  company  will  rather  distress  than 
give  your  father  pleasure." 

"  I  will  be  composed,"  said  Ellen  ;  "  indeed  I 
will :  it  was  only  my  first  alarm  that  occasioned 
all  this  terror." 

Mrs.  Irvin  saw,  in  Miss  Campbell's  counte- 
nance, that  there  was  something  yet  untold  ;  she 
therefore  bade  the  agitated  girl  immediately  go 
and  tell  Martin  to  put  up  their  clothes,  and  to  send 
William  to  order  a  carriage  at  whatever  time  she 
herself  should  choose.  Ellen  thanked  her  for 
this  proof  of  kindness  ;  and,  with  her  whole 
thoughts  occupied  on  what  might  be  the  state  of 
her  father,  she  left  the  room  to  obey  her  directions, 

Miss  Campbell  then  informed  Mrs.  Irvin,  that 
her  brother  had  heard  Mr.  Stanley  had  greatly 
lessened  his  fortune  by  gaming,  and  that  his  ill- 
ness was  occasioned  by  the  anxiety  of  his  mind 
on  that  account. 

It  being  early  in  the  morning,  Mrs.  Irvin  was 
as  desirous  as  Ellen  of  hastening  their  journey ; 
and  hoped,  by  setting  off  directly,  they  should  be 
in  town  that  evening. 

At  that  moment  Mr.  Herbert,  who  had  heard 
still  more  of  Mr.  Stanley's  situation  from  the 
younger  Mr.  Campbell,  came  in ;  and  observing 
their  earnest  wish  of  being  there  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible, he  kindly  offered  to  accompany  them. 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  •  163 

This  was  what  Ellen  particularly  wished  ;  and 
as  the  gentleman  who  had  just  arrived,  had  en- 
gaged to  supply  Mr.  Herbert's  place  in  the  per- 
formance of  his  parochial  duties,  he  had  nothing 
to  prevent  his  compliance. 

With  such  a  companion  during  their  journey, 
our  heroine  in  some  measure  regained  her  usual 
composure  ;  but  she  had  no  sooner  entered  her 
father's  house,  than  all  her  agitation  returned. 

She  was  scarcely  out  of  the  chaise,  before  she 
asked  his  man,  the  only  servant  they  saw,  and 
who  seemed  surprised  at  the  arrival,  "  how  his 
master  was  ?" 

"  He  is  very  ill,  madam,"  said  he,  as  he  show- 
ed them  into  a  cold  and  comfortless  apartment ; 
s"  he  has  not  been  out  of  his  bed  for  several  days. 
I  do  not  know  how  he  will  like  your  coming, 
madam,"  said  he. 

"  Tell  him  I  am  here,"  said  Ellen,  disregard- 
ing the  latter  part  of  his  answer.  The  man 
seemed  distressed,  and  unwilling  to  leave  the 
room  :  "  Sure  you  know  me  ?"  said  Ellen,  greatly 
hurried  ;  "I  am  his  daughter  !" 

"  Yes,  yes,  madam  ;  but  I  fear  he  will  be  great- 
ly displeased  ;  he  is  so  very  particular.  I  men- 
tioned informing  you  of  his  illness  ;  but  he  said 
you  were  the  last  person  he  wished  to  see." 

"  What !"  replied  Ellen,  "  not  wish  to  see  me — 
his  child  !  What  can  I  have  done  to  offend  him  ? 
But  I  must  and  will  see  him  ;  tell  him  I  will 
nurse  him — I  will  do  everything  for  him." 

Her  aunt  and  Mr.  Herbert  were  hurt  at  her  dis- 
tress ;  and,  as  the  man  still  seemed  unwilling  to 


164  .  THE  TWIN  STSTERS. 

inform  his  master,  the  latter  suggested  her  writ- 
ing a  note  and  sending  to  him. 

When  this  .was  carried,  her  aunt  could  scarcely 
restrain  her  from  following  the  servant :  and  she 
waited  his  return  with  fearful  anxiety. 

At  length  he  came,  and  said  his  master  would 
see  her  if  she  was  quite  alone  ;  and  Ellen,  trem- 
bling and  agitated,  ascended  the  stairs  to  her  fa- 
ther's room. 

He  took  no  notice  of  her  coming  in  ;  and  when 
she  saw  his  pallid  and  disturbed  countenance,  her 
feelings  nearly  overcame  her.  She  knelt  by  his 
bed-side,  and  taking  his  wasted  hand,  which, 
though  not  withdrawn,  was  not  stretched  out  to 
receive  her,  pressed  it  to  her  lips,  and,  with  tears 
in  her  eyes,  thanked  him  for  admitting  her. 

Regardless  of  her  affection,  he  seemed  deter- 
mined to  make  no  answer  ;  but  looking  to  the  ser- 
vant, he  asked  for  the  draught  he  had  been  order- 
ed to  take  at  that  time. 

"  If  I  do  not  think  of  these  things  myself,"  said 
he,  "you  never  will." 

The  man  hastened  to  give  it  to  him ;  but  Ellen 
said,  "  Let  me  pour  it  out  ;  I  will  give  it  to  my 
father  ;  I  am  come  to  be  his  nurse  :  won't  you  let 
me,  sir  ?"  continued  she,  with  a  supplicating  look, 
as  she  offered  him  the  cup.  He  faintly  thanked 
her,  but  said,  "  he  did  not  want  a  nurse." 

"  But  you  will  not  deny  me  the  pleasure  of  at- 
tending you  ?"  said  she,  venturing  to  touch  his 
cheek  with  her  lips.  "  My  father  always  wished 
to  give  me  pleasure." 

The  feelings  which  her  gentle  voice  inspired 
seemed  greatly  to  oppress  him  ;  and  ordering  the 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  165 

man  to  leave  the  room,  he  drew  her  nearer  to  his 
embrace,  and  exclaimed,  "  Oh  !  you  are  my  child  ! 
but  Ellen,  you  know  not  what  a  miserable  being 
I  am  !  I  deserve  not  the  name  of  father  :  I  have 
ruined  you !" 

The  big  tears  which  rolled  down  his  pale  wan 
face  prevented  further  utterance  ;  while  he  seem- 
ed astonished  at  his  own  emotion,  and  pushing 
her  away  from  him,  he  exclaimed,  "  Go — get 
away  !  you  make  a  baby  of  me  !" 

"  No,  my  father,"  replied  Ellen,  her  tears  ac- 
companying his,  "  I  cannot  leave  you  :  are  the 
feelings  of  a  parent  any  disgrace  1  Do  but  say 
you  love  me,  and  that  is  all  I  wish  !" 

"  How  can  I  do  otherwise  ?"  said  he,  still  more 
softened  :  "  but  when  you  know  all,  you  cannot, 
will  not  think  it." 

"  I  wish  not  to  know  anything  else  at  present," 
returned  Ellen,  pressing  his  hand  :  "  if  you  will 
let  me  stay  and  pay  you  every  attention  in  my 
power,  it  is  all  I  am  anxious  for.  But  we  will 
talk  no  more  to-night,"  continued  she — "  it  may 
fatigue  you  ;  to-morrow,  perhaps,  you  will  see 
my  aunt ;  she  is  come  with  me." 

"  And  who  is  the  gentleman  Robinson  told  me 
of?"  inquired  her  father. 

"  Mr.  Herbert,"  replied  Ellen  ;  "  that  good  man 
would  not  let  us  take  so  long  a  journey,  and  so 
late  in  the  day,  without  his  accompanying  us." 

"  He  is  a  good  man,"  said  Mr.  Stanley  ;  "  too 
good  for  me  to  see." 

Ellen  made  no  answer  ;  but  ringing  the  bell, 
she  inquired  who  sat  up  with  her  father. 


166  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

"  I  do,  madam,"  answered  Robinson  ;  "I  am 
his  only  attendant." 

"  Robinson  is  very  good,"  said  Mr.  Stanley  ; 
"  but  I  know  not  how  I  shall  reward  him  ;"  and 
desiring  Ellen  to  take  care  of  herself  and  friends, 
he  expressed  a  wish  to  see  her  early  the  next 
morning. 

She  left  them  with  a  heart  overflowing  with 
gratitude  to  her  Heavenly  Father,  and  related  to 
her  aunt  and  Mr.  Herbert,  with  tears  of  joy,  the 
reception  she  had  gained.  But  there  was  still  a 
thoughtful  melancholy  on  the  countenance  of 
each,  which  she  could  not  account  for. 

"  Has  nobody  offered  you  any  refreshment  1" 
said  she  ;  "  surely  the  servants  are  not  so  atten- 
tive as  usual ;  let  me  order  a  fire  and  supper  to 
be  brought  in ;  you  have  been  sitting  in  the  cold 
all  this  time,  and  I  have  never  thought  of  it." 

Mr.  Herbert  then  told  her  they  had  seen  Rob- 
inson, and  that  he  with  one  female  servant  were 
the  only  domestics  her  father  then  had  in  the 
house. 

She  was  a  little  startled  at  this  intelligence, 
and  inquired  the  cause. 

"  Robinson  tells  us,  that  as  his  master  seldom 
spent  any  time  at  home,  he  thought  them  only 
encumbrances  ;  and  that,  about  a  week  before  he 
was  taken  ill,  he  discharged  all  the  rest;  but 
this,"  continued  Mr.  Herbert,  "  we  must  not  flat- 
ter you  is  the  only  reason  :"  and  he  then,  in  the 
gentlest  manner,  informed  her  of  the  report  Mr. 
Campbell  had  brought  to  Mil  wood,  and  which 
the  state  they  found  the  family  in  too  clearly  con- 
firmed. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  167 

The  calm  composure  with  which  Ellen  heard 
this  confirmation  of  her  fears  discovered  how 
well  she  was  prepared  for  any  change  of  for- 
tune. Its  diminution,  or  even  total  loss,  seemed 
nothing  to  her,  if  she  could  retain  her  father's 
love,  and  see  him  happy  ;  and  her  rapid  imagi- 
nation already  formed  a  hundred  plans  of  what 
she  would  do  to  reconcile  him  to  his  situa- 
tion. 

The  maid-servant  then  entered  the  room,  and, 
with  many  apologies,  offered  to  conduct  them  to 
another  parlor,  where  a  fire  and  a  supper  were 
provided  for  their  refreshment ;  but  the  various 
ideas  which  crowded  Ellen's  mind  as  she  passed 
through  these  apartments,  which  she  had  formerly 
beheld  full  of  company,  and  the  recollection  of 
those  gay  and  giddy  scenes,  took  from  her  all 
inclination  to  eat,  and  she  sat  silently  musing  on 
the  vicissitudes  which,  even  in  her  short  life,  she 
had  experienced. 

Mrs.  Irvin  had  again  recourse  to  anticipated 
pleasures. — "  You  found  no  satisfaction  like  what, 
I  hope,  you  will  in  future  enjoy,  my  dear,"  said 
she,  "  in  all  the  follies  of  the  world." 

"  Ah  !"  said  Ellen,  sighing,  "  it  is  their  follies 
I  regret :  pleasure  or  satisfaction  I  am  sure  I 
never  felt  while  I  was  engaged  in  them :  but  I 
am  sorry  that  so  many  are  mistaken  in  the  path 
they  choose." 

Mr.  Herbert  feared  to  pursue  this  subject ; 
but  after  the  cloth  was  removed,  by  his  reli- 
gious and  friendly  conversation,  he  led  her  mind 
to  rest  on  the  Almighty  for  assistance  and  sup- 
port. 


168  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

Before  they  parted  for  the  night,  they  joined 
in  prayer  ;  and,  imploring  the  aid  and  protection 
of  their  Creator,  they  retired  to  sleep  with  grate- 
ful and  composed  affections  toward  God  and 
the  world. 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  169 


CHAPTER  XII. 

"  In  prosperity,  the  bountiful  Giver  is  obscured  by  the  mul- 
titude of  his  own  gifts;  but  when  the  tempest  of  adversity 
descends,  this  cloud  is  dispersed,  and  man,  desolate  and  for- 
lorn, feels  the  necessities  of  his  nature,  his  weakness  and  de- 
pendance,  his  hopelessness,  and  need  of  Divine  aid  ;  and  re- 
turns repentant  to  duty,  to  happiness,  and  to  GOD." 

When  Mr.  Herbert  and  Mrs.  Irvin  were  the 
next  morning  introduced  to  Mr.  Stanley,  he  was 
too  polite  not  to  appear  obliged  by  their  visit, 
though  it  was  evident  he  felt  embarrassed  in  their 
company.  They  observed  his  silence,  however, 
and  after  the  first  compliments  at  meeting  were 
over,  soon  left  the  room,  under  the  excuse  of  fear- 
ing to  fatigue  him  by  too  long  a  stay. 

When  again  alone  with  his  daughter,  she,  wil- 
ling to  remove  the  chagrin  which  still  disturbed 
his  countenance,  asked  if  he  had  seen  the  Ar- 
nolds very  lately.  "  Oh,  no !  they  would  not 
come  to  visit  a  sick  man,  and  one  who  is  poor 
also  ;  in  short,  my  dear,"  said  he,  with  a  sigh, 
"  no  one  but  yourself  would  think  it  worth  their 
while  to  come  near  me  :  you  I  knew  I  had  in- 
jured, and  therefore  I  was  unwilling  to  see  you ; 
but  to  my  friends  in  town,  as  they  were  falsely 
called,  I  never  did  a  wrong,  but,  while  in  my 
power,  I  always  contributed  to  their  amusement ; 
and  now  they  find  I  can  no  longer  promote  this, 
they  are  gone  to  seek  another  dupe  !" 
15 


170  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

This  was  spoken  with  such  an  air  of  regret 
and  wounded  pride,  that  Ellen  was  sorry  she  had 
led  to  the  subject ;  but  with  a  smile  of  affection 
she  answered  :  "  And  you,  my  dear  father,  will, 
I  hope,  seek  other  friends ;  I  know  some  who 
will  deserve  that  name,  if  you  will  allow  them  it. 
— At  Milwood  we  are  all  friends,  and  as  much 
so  in  adversity  as  in  prosperity.  I  should  think 
the  change  of  air  and  scene  would  help  your  re- 
covery also,"  added  she  :  "  my  aunt  means  to  offer 
you  part  of  her  house,  if  you  will  accept  it.  There 
it  shall  be  my  endeavor  to  remove  every  uneasi- 
ness you  may  have,  and  by  my  earnest  attention 
and  sincere  affection  to  add  to  your  future  happi- 
ness." 

Again  softened  by  her  tenderness,  he  pressed 
her  to  his  bosom.  "  If  anything  could  give  balm 
to  a  wounded  mind,"  said  he,  "  it  would  be  such 
kind  regard  as  yours,  my  Ellen :  but  I  am  not 
worthy  of  it." 

Ellen,  with  increased  emotion,  assured  him  all 
her  future  life  should  be  employed  in  convincing 
him  to  the  contrary  :  and  then,  by  his  desire,  went 
to  beg  Mr.  Herbert's  return  to  him  for  a  short  time. 

This  request  was  readily  complied  with  ;  and, 
won  by  the  friendly  interest  this  good  man  seem- 
ed to  take  in  all  that  concerned  him,  Mr.  Stanley 
laid  before  him  all  his  pecuniary  affairs.  His 
debts  of  honor  appeared  considerable  in  Mr.  Her- 
bert's eyes  ;  though  their  whole  amount  could  not 
be  ascertained  till  farther  inquiries  were  made. 
Mr.  Stanley  blamed  himself  for  playing  for  the 
very  high  sums  he  had  lately  staked,  but  he  ac- 
knowledged there  were  still  other  debts  ;  and  his 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  171 

new  friend  encouraged  him  to  look  into  them 
without  delay. 

The  attorney  was  therefore  sent  for,  and,  after 
many  arrangements,  all  was  left  to  his  manage- 
ment ;  and  Mr.  Stanley  listened  with  complacen- 
cy to  the  scheme  both  Mrs.  Irvin  and  his  daugh- 
ter had  proposed,  of  his  returning  to  Milwood 
with  them,  as  the  society  of  Mr.  Herbert  appear- 
ed every  day  more  agreeable  to  him. 

His  house  in  town,  with  all  its  furniture,  was 
disposed  of;  and  in  about  a  month  after  Ellen 
had,  with  so  much  anxiety,  hastened  to  a  parent 
whom  she  feared  to  find  dying,  she  had  the  satis- 
faction of  returning  with  him  to  the  place  of  all 
others  she  most  wished,  with  composed  spirits  ; 
and  though  still  unwell,  with  greater  appearance 
of  amended  health  than,  when  she  first  saw  him, 
she  could  allow  herself  to  hope. 

The  change  was  such  as  Mr.  Stanley  had 
never  before  experienced ;  for  when,  before,  he 
had  left  the  town,  it  was  only  to  meet  the  same 
company,  and  the  same  pursuits,  in  some  fashion- 
able watering-place  :  but  he  was  now  really  in 
the  country,  and  in  the  midst  of  winter  ;  with  no 
other  companions  than  an  old  woman  and  a  young 
girl,  both  so  attached  to  their  own  plan  of  happi- 
ness (a  sketch  of  which  the  reader  has  seen), 
that  they  concluded  there  was  none  other  capable 
of  affording  it ;  and  yet  Mr.  Stanley  did  not  wish 
himself  away.  Here  he  had  time  to  reflect ;  and 
he  was  astonished  at  the  recollection  of  his  for- 
mer life,  dependant  on  so  many  people  for  amuse- 
ment and  employment ;  for  often  he  had  flown  to 
the  former,  as  a  means  of  passing  away  the  hours 


172  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

that  hung  heavily  on  his  hands,  but  at  Milwood 
he  never  found  a  vacant  hour.  Without  his  old 
pursuits, — no  tavern  or  coffee-house  to  lounge  in, 
where  he  met  with  companions  like  himself,  who 
were  drawn  together  merely  for  the  sake  of  kill- 
ing time, — here  he  met  with  real  attention  :  El- 
len, and  often  Mr.  Herbert,  left  their  own  employ- 
ments, to  amuse  or  converse  with  him. 

Every  morning  after  breakfast,  while  he  was 
in  too  weak  a  state  to  be  much  out  of  the  house, 
Ellen  first  read  to  him,  then  played  or  sang ;  and 
soon  his  old  taste  for  music  returned,  and  he  be- 
came again  a  performer.  The  books  he  read 
tended  farther  to  illustrate  those  important  truths 
that  Mr.  Herbert  in  his  conversation  inculcated, 
and  in  his  conduct  practised. 

Here,  too,  Mr.  Stanley  saw  a  uniform  respect 
paid  to  the  Sabbath, — that  day  which,  if  properly 
spent,  adds  grace  and  happiness  to  all  the  rest ; 
and  by  the  example  of  those  about  him,  he  was 
led  to  attend  the  church,  and,  like  them  also,  he 
found  comfort  in  so  doing. — He  had  all  his  life 
been  seeking  after  happiness ;  but  now,  when 
nearly  driven  to  despair,  he  came  desponding, 
and  not  expecting,  or  scarcely  wishing,  to  dis- 
cover it  in  the  country,  he  found,  in  a  quiet  peace- 
ful life,  dedicated  to  religion  and  the  good  of 
others,  the  truest  enjoyment ;  leaving  far  behind 
him  the  world,  and  all  its  visionary  plans,  he  be- 
came acquainted  with  a  higher  source  of  pleasure, 
and  was  imperceptibly  led  to  admit  the  claims  of 
reason  in  its  favor,  which  the  falsely  named  gaye- 
ties  he  had  hitherto  pursued  would  allow  him  no 
time  to  consider. 


THE    TWIN    SISTERS.  173 

The  little  Campbells  often  afforded  him  much 
entertainment,  and  not  seldom  instruction  also. 
Even  these  children  had  been  taught  to  see  things 
in  a  more  comprehensive  view  than  he  did  ;  and 
in  all  their  conclusions,  there  was  a  reference  to 
the  world  to  come,  as  well  as  to  this. 

Mr.  Stanley  would  ask  them  questions  which 
a  false  shame  often  prevented  his  putting  to 
others  ;  and  their  answers,  though  given  in  all  the 
simplicity  of  childhood,  were  such  as  often  pro- 
duced serious  consideration  in  his  mind. 

The  elder  Miss  Campbell  sometimes  amused 
him  with  her  music  ;  but  the  little  boys  and  girls 
were  his  favorite  companions  ;  and  he  was  so 
good  a  friend  to  them,  that  they  were  always  hap- 
py in  his  company. 

As  the  spring  advanced,  Mr.  Stanley's  health 
was  quite  restored ;  and  Ellen  was  made  still 
more  happy,  by  observing  his  inclinations  perfect- 
ly accommodated  to  his  situation.  He  walked 
every  day,  sometimes  alone,  or  with  her  and  Mrs. 
Irvin  ;  and  afterward  took  a  ride  either  with  Mr. 
Herbert  or  Mr.  Campbell.  There  was  nothing 
contradictory  in  the  conversation  of  those  he  was 
now  with ;  all,  from  the  least  even  to  the  great- 
est, united  in  their  opinions,  and  their  actions 
agreed  with  their  words.  It  was  this  uniformity 
which  led  Mr.  Stanley  seriously  to  conclude  that 
the  truth  was  on  their  side  :  as  all  were  happy 
and  contented,  even  among  the  poor,  with  whom 
he  often  conversed,  and  wherever  peace  and  com- 
fort seemed  to  dwell,  these  sentiments  were  the 
source  from  which  they  arose. 

The  ensuing  season  was  the  happiest  Ellen 
15# 


174  THE    TWIN    SISTERS. 

ever  knew  ;  her  father  became  more  and  more 
attached  to  her,  and  he  delighted  to  see  her  con- 
scientiously following  the  path  of  duty,  without 
allowing  herself  to  lessen  her  exertions  in  doing 
good. 

In  the  course  of  this  year  Miss  Campbell  mar- 
ried ;  and  after  a  few  days  spent  at  her  father's 
house,  this  excellent  young  woman  was  removed 
to  a  larger  sphere  of  action,  as  the  gentleman  to 
whom  she  was  united  possessed  a  large  estate  in 
a  distant  county.  Thither  some  of  her  sisters 
went  to  visit  her  every  year  ;  and  they  always  re- 
turned with  some  happy  account  of  her  goodness. 
"  That  she  was  quite  another  Mrs.  Irvin  in  the 
place  where  she  lived,"  was  the  character  they 
gave  of  her  ;  and  the  poor  in  her  neighborhood 
were  grateful  in  their  acknowledgments  of  the 
kindness  she  was  continually  showing  them. 
The  greatest  grief  that  Ellen  could  know,  next  to 
the  death  of  her  father  and  aunt,  was  that  of  Mr. 
Herbert ;  and  she  was  soon  called  to  this  trial, 
though  not  till  she  had  seen  every  good  effect  she 
could  wish  from  his  society  with  her  father. 
This  worthy  man  glorified  God  in  his  death ;  and, 
thankfully  resigning  his  life  into  the  hands  of  Him 
who  gave  it,  and  who  made  it  so  eminently  use- 
ful, he  entered  into  a  happier  world,  without  a 
sigh  for  that  he  left.  The  whole  parish  of  Mil- 
wood,  to  whom  he  had  for  so  many  years  been  a 
faithful  pastor,  mourned  his  loss  ;  though  their 
grief  was  lessened  on  hearing  that  the  younger 
Mr.  Campbell,  whose  sentiments  and  manners 
were  so  like  his  own,  was  to  succeed  him  as  their 
minister. 


THE  TWIN  SISTERS.  175 

In  a  short  time,  Ellen  became  his  wife  ;  and  a 
house  which  had  been  built  for  some  of  their 
friends,  who  were  now  prevented  from  inhabiting 
it,  was  fitted  up  for  their  reception. 

About  this  time,  also,  poor  old  Dame  Hunt  died, 
who  had  been  long  confined  to  her  bed,  and  was 
supported  by  the  care  of  Betsy  Forbes  :  and  now 
Ellen  took  both  her  and  her  sister  into  her  family  ; 
the  former  became  her  own  servant,  and  Mary, 
though  prevented  by  her  misfortune  from  being 
as  useful  as  she  wished,  was  not  without  employ- 
ment. 

Mr.  Stanley  and  Mrs.  Irvin  still  inhabited  the 
same  house,  and  had  the  satisfaction  of  seeing 
Ellen  following  the  education  she  had  herself  re- 
ceived, in  that  of  her  own  children,  of  whom  she 
had  a  numerous  family. 

In  a  few  years  this  affectionate  and  best  belov- 
ed aunt  was  taken  from  her,  to  receive  a  crown 
of  life  through  the  merits  of  her  Savior,  whose 
faithful  servant  she  had  so  long  been.  Ellen  was 
with  her  till  the  last  breath  of  life  was  expired  ; 
but  the  certainty  of  the  happiness  promised  to  all 
whose  sincerity  of  faith  and  profession  is  proved, 
like  this  excellent  woman's,  by  a  uniform  life 
and  conduct,  and  which  she  could  not  doubt  she 
was  now  enjoying,  precluded  all  unseasonable 
sorrow. 

On  the  death  of  Mrs.  Irvin,  her  faithful  Martin 
once  more  became  a  careful  and  affectionate 
nurse,  and  performed  that  office  to  the  children  of 
her  beloved  young  mistress,  with  the  same  ten- 
der affection  she  had  formerly  shown  to  herself. 

As  her  aunt  had  left  all  her  property  to  the 


176  THE  TWIN  SISTERS. 

younger  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Campbell,  Ellen  again  be- 
came an  inhabitant  of  Milwood  Lodge.  Mr. 
Herbert  and  Mrs.  Irvin  seemed  once  more  to  live 
in  this  worthy  pair  ;  and  both  the  parents  of  these 
their  excellent  representatives  lived  to  see  them 
rear 

"  A  numerous  offspring,  lovely,  like  themselves, 
And  good — the  grace  of  all  the  country  round." 


THE    END 


-/* 


I 


r 


£> 


